Menu

Acts 27:40 — Word Study

Depth

N1904καὶ τὰς ἀγκύρας περιελόντες εἴων εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν, ἅμα ἀνέντες τὰς ζευκτηρίας τῶν πηδαλίων καὶ ἐπάραντες τὸν ἀρτέμωνα τῇ πνεούσῃ κατεῖχον εἰς τὸν αἰγιαλόν.

BSAAndkai theho anchorsagkura [letting them go, abandoning them] having cut awayperiaireō they were leaving [them]eaō ineis theho sea,thalassa [the Mediterranean, a large body of water] at the same timehama having loosenedaniēmi [untied, set free] theho ropeszeuktēria [cords, fastenings] of theho rudderspēdalion [steering devices, navigational tools] Andkai having hoistedepairō [lifted up, raised] theho foresailartemōn [the sail at the front, the artemon] to theho blowing [wind]pneō [the breeze, the blowing air] they were makingkatechō foreis theho shore.aigialos [the shore, the coastline, the land]

Word
Listen & take awayActs 27
English ↓ Download MP3 The Berean Standard Bible chapter audio already hosted for the site's Bible section — verse 40 is in this chapter.
Say the word Each Greek word carries its transliteration (aigialos) — no per-word recordings of the Greek exist to link to.
Take it away
Acts 27:40quick helps
In a sentenceThe crew cuts away the anchors and prepares to sail towards the beach.
Who is speakingThe author of Acts, likely Luke, recounts the events of the ship's journey.
Where we areIn the midst of a stormy sea, the crew is taking decisive action to navigate to safety.
The hard wordπεριαιρέω
Take awayThey are leaving behind the anchors to make way for the ship.
8 commentators on this verse Gill, Jamieson, Poole, Trapp & more — read them › clause subjectπεριαιρέω verbπεριαιρέω The sentence as the grammar sees it Open the tree ›
How rare are these words?in the New Testament

2 of 24 occur nowhere else in the New Testament — words chosen on purpose.

Bars are logarithmic — , the commonest word in the Greek New Testament, stands 19,867 times, so a linear scale would leave everything else invisible. Click a row to open that word.

Deep Study — Acts 27:40

Sections marked generated are written from the data on this page rather than by a named author. Everything else — the lexicon entries, the cross references, the manuscript readings, the counts — is quoted from its source unchanged.

Context — The Shipwreck on Maltagenerated

39When daylight came, they did not recognize the land, but they sighted a bay with a sandy beach, where they decided to run the ship aground if they could.
40Cutting away the anchors, they left them in the sea as they loosened the ropes that held the rudders. Then they hoisted the foresail to the wind and made for the beach.
41But the vessel struck a sandbar and ran aground. The bow stuck fast and would not move, and the stern was being broken up by the pounding of the waves.
42The soldiers planned to kill the prisoners so none of them could swim to freedom.

Acts 27:40 describes the actions of the ship's crew as they prepare to navigate towards safety after cutting away the anchors. This moment is critical as they loosen the ropes holding the rudders and hoist the foresail to catch the wind, illustrating their desperation and determination to reach land amidst the chaos of the sea. This passage highlights the tension and urgency of their situation, as they are faced with the threat of shipwreck.


Cross References

ReferenceText (BSB)
1Acts 27:29–30Fearing that we would run aground on the rocks, they dropped four anchors from the stern and prayed for daybreak.
2Isaiah 33:23Your ropes are slack; they cannot secure the mast or spread the sail. Then an abundance of spoils will be divided, and even the lame will carry off plunder.

The Treasury of Scripture Knowledge — 2 references, hung on the phrase they belong to

taken up, etcActs 27:29–30
the rudder bandsIsaiah 33:23

The Key Word περιαιρέω, periaireōgenerated

The word περιελόντες is a second aorist active participle from περιαιρέω, meaning 'having cut away.' This verb conveys the action of removing something that surrounds or holds back, emphasizing the crew's decisive action in cutting away the anchors.

This participle is in the nominative plural masculine form, indicating that it refers to the crew as a collective group. The action they take is both physical and metaphorical, representing a willingness to let go of what hinders them in order to move forward.


How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated

In this study, we compare translations of the verse, starting with the Berean Standard Bible (BSB), which uses the phrase cutting away the anchors. This is echoed in the KJV and ASV, which also emphasize the action of removing the anchors.

However, the BBE translates it as letting them go, which adds a nuance of abandonment. The translations diverge further in the rendering of having loosened, with the KJV using loosed while the FBV opts for untied.


Sentence Structuregenerated

The verse is structured around a series of actions initiated by the crew, with the main verb being περιελόντες (having cut away). This action governs the subsequent phrases that describe what they did next: leaving the anchors, loosening the ropes, hoisting the foresail, and making for the beach.

The sequence of actions is tightly connected, with each phrase building upon the last to illustrate the urgency of their situation. The use of participial phrases emphasizes the ongoing nature of their actions as they navigate the challenges before them.


Septuagint Backgroundgenerated

The word περιαιρέω does not have a direct equivalent in the Septuagint, but its concept of removal is reflected in the Hebrew word סוּר (H5493), which means 'to turn aside' or 'to remove.' This connection highlights a common biblical theme of letting go of burdens or obstacles.

The term θάλασσα (sea) appears in the Septuagint as יָם (H3220), indicating large bodies of water, similar to the context of Acts 27:40 where the crew is navigating the Mediterranean Sea.


In plain words — the whole versegenerated

Acts 27:40 describes how the crew of the ship cut away the anchors and loosened the ropes that held the rudders. They hoisted the foresail to catch the wind and headed for the beach, showing their determination to reach safety.


Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated

What does it mean to cut away the anchors?

Cutting away the anchors signifies a decisive action to free the ship from what is holding it back, allowing for movement towards safety.

Why is the foresail important?

The foresail is crucial for catching the wind, which helps propel the ship forward, especially in a dire situation where speed is essential.

What challenges did the crew face in this situation?

The crew faced the challenges of navigating a stormy sea while ensuring the ship's safety and the safety of its passengers, which required quick and decisive actions.

How does this passage reflect themes of hope and survival?

This passage illustrates themes of hope and survival as the crew takes bold steps to escape danger, symbolizing the human spirit's resilience in the face of adversity.


Reflection Questionsgenerated

  1. What anchors in my life do I need to cut away to move forward?
  2. How can I better prepare myself to face challenges, like the crew preparing to sail?
  3. In what ways can I trust in the winds of change to guide me towards safety?
  4. How do I respond when faced with difficult decisions that require decisive action?

The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it

Several early church Fathers comment on this passage, interpreting the actions of the crew as symbolic of faith and divine guidance during trials.

Hippolytus of RomeHippolytus Dogmatical and Historical Fragments c. 170–235
And she bears in her midst also the trophy (which is erected) over death; for she carries with her the cross of the Lord.
Early Church Fathers on Acts 27 →
John ChrysostomHomily on Acts 53 c. 347–407
"They made towards shore," having given the rudder-handles to the wind: for oftentimes they do it not in this way. They were borne along, having loosed the rigging, that is, the sails.
Early Church Fathers on Acts 27 →
BedeCommentary on Acts c. 673–735
And hoisting the foresail, according to the direction of the breeze, they made for the shore. The foresail is a small sail contrived more for steering the ship than for speed.
Early Church Fathers on Acts 27 →

Commentators on this verse — 8 expositors, verse by verse

Each of these wrote on Acts 27:40 itself, not merely on the chapter around it.

John Gill1697–1771Gill's Exposition of the Entire Bible

And when they had taken up the anchors,.... The four anchors they cast out of the stern, Acts 27:29 or "when they had cut the anchors", as the Syriac and Arabic versions render it; that is, had cut

Read John Gill on Acts 27 →
Robert Jamieson1802–1880Jamieson, Fausset, and Brown's Commentary

And when they had taken up the anchors, they committed themselves unto the sea, and loosed the rudder bands, and hoised up the mainsail to the wind, and made toward shore.

Read Robert Jamieson on Acts 27 →
Matthew Poole1624–1679Matthew Poole's Commentary on the Holy Bible

Loosed the rudder bands; rudders is in the plural number put for the singular: or rather, in those times they having two rudders, (as by several passages amongst the ancients do appear), they were both loosed, that now they might use them to direct the ship to the best advantage in making the shore, they having been tied whilst they were adrift, or at anchor. Hoised up the mainsail, which they had let down, or struck, , and now, that they might make some use of the winds, to get nigher to the shore, they hoisted up. As God doth instruct the ploughman, , so he teacheth the mariner, and every one in their calling.

Read Matthew Poole on Acts 27 →
John Trapp1601–1669Trapp's Complete Commentary on the Old and New Testaments

40 And when they had taken up the anchors, they committed themselves unto the sea, and loosed the rudder bands, and hoised up the mainsail to the wind, and made toward shore. Ver. 40. Hoised up the mainsail] Which before they had struck by reason of the violence of the storm. If God afflict, we must carry our sail accordingly, Rth 1:20.

Read John Trapp on Acts 27 →
Charles John Ellicott1819–1905Ellicott's Commentary for English Readers

(40) And when they had taken up the anchors.—Better, And when they had cleared away (or, cut off) the anchors, they let them go into the sea. It is obvious that nothing would have been gained at such a juncture by encumbering the ship, which they were anxious to lighten as much as possible, with the weight of the four anchors. The meaning given above is accordingly more in harmony with the facts of the case as well as with the Greek, which does not warrant the insertion of the pronoun in “they committed themselves.” Loosed the rudder bands.—This was the necessary sequel to the previous operation. While the ship was anchored the two large paddle-like rudders with which ancient ships were…

Read Charles John Ellicott on Acts 27 →
AdamClarkeAdam Clarke's Commentary on the Bible

Verse 40. Taken up the anchors] Weighed all the anchors that they had cast out of the stern. Some think the meaning of the word is, they slipped their cables; and so left the anchors in the sea. This opinion is expressed in the margin. Loosed the rudder bands] Or, the bands of the rudders; for large vessels in ancient times had two or more rudders, one at the side, and another at the stern, and sometimes one at the prow. The bands, ζευκτηριας, were some kind of fastenings, by which the rudders were hoisted some way out of the water; for, as they could be of no use in the storm, and, should there come fair weather, the vessel could not do without them, this was a prudent way of securing them…

Read AdamClarke on Acts 27 →
CambridgeThe Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges

40. And when they had taken up the anchors] The verb in the original implies that they cast loose all the anchors round about the stern of the vessel where they had laid them out. So the R. V. rightly gives “And casting off the anchors.” When they had thrown overboard a load of corn, they would have no wish to encumber themselves with the weight of the anchors or to take the trouble of hauling them up.they committed themselves unto the sea] The italics of the A. V. shew that “themselves” is unrepresented in the original. It is far better to refer the verb to the anchors already mentioned, and render (with R. V.) “they left them in the sea.”and loosed the rudder bands] The original has an…

Read Cambridge on Acts 27 →
Albert Barnes1798–1870Barnes' Notes on the Bible

Had taken up the anchors - The four anchors with which they had moored the ship, Acts 27:29. See the margin. The expression may mean that they slipped or cut their cables, and that thus they left the anchors in the sea.

Read Albert Barnes on Acts 27 →

The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company

Every translation on this page is a decision someone had to make and commit to. Read down a column and you see one translator's judgement; read across a row and you see the range the Greek actually allows. The BSB is the wording the rest of this page is measured against, so it is listed first.

Modern formal

BSBBerean Standard Bible2020

Cutting away the anchors, they left them in the sea as they loosened the ropes that held the rudders. Then they hoisted the foresail to the wind and made for the beach.

WEBWorld English Bible2000

Casting off the anchors, they left them in the sea, at the same time untying the rudder ropes. Hoisting up the foresail to the wind, they made for the beach.

MSBMajority Standard Bible2022

Cutting away the anchors, they left them in the sea as they loosened the ropes that held the rudders. Then they hoisted the foresail to the wind and made for the beach.

NETBNew English Translation2006

So they slipped the anchors and left them in the sea, at the same time loosening the linkage that bound the steering oars together. Then they hoisted the foresail to the wind and steered toward the beach.

Tyndale line

KJVKing James Version1611

And when they had taken up the anchors, they committed themselves unto the sea, and loosed the rudder bands, and hoised up the mainsail to the wind, and made toward shore.

ASVAmerican Standard Version1901

And casting off the anchors, they left them in the sea, at the same time loosing the bands of the rudders; and hoisting up the foresail to the wind, they made for the beach.

RVARevised Version, American1894

And casting off the anchors, they left them in the sea, at the same time loosing the bands of the rudders; and hoisting up the foresail to the wind, they made for the beach.

NWBWebster's Bible1833

And when they had taken up the anchors, they committed themselves to the sea, and loosed the rudder bands, and hoisted the mainsail to the wind, and made towards the shore.

GNVGeneva Bible1599

So when they had taken vp the ankers, they committed the ship vnto the sea, and loosed the rudder bonds, and hoised vp the maine saile to the winde, and drewe to the shore.

Strictly literal

DBYDarby Translation1890

and, having cast off the anchors, they left [them] in the sea, at the same time loosening the lashings of the rudders, and hoisting the foresail to the wind, they made for the strand.

YLTYoung's Literal Translation1862

and the anchors having taken up, they were committing [it] to the sea, at the same time — having loosed the bands of the rudders, and having hoisted up the mainsail to the wind — they were making for the shore,

LSVLiteral Standard Version2020

and having taken up the anchors, they were committing [it] to the sea, at the same time—having loosed the bands of the rudders, and having hoisted up the foresail to the wind—they were making for the shore,

ULBUnlocked Literal Bible2017

So they cut loose the anchors and left them in the sea. At the same time they loosed the ropes of the rudders and raised the foresail to the wind; and so they headed to the beach.

From the Latin

DRADouay-Rheims (Challoner)1899

And when they had taken up the anchors, they committed themselves to the sea, loosing withal the rudder bands; and hoisting up the mainsail to the wind, they made towards shore.

Simplified

FBVFree Bible Version2020

So they cut the anchor ropes, leaving the anchors in the sea. At the same time they untied the ropes holding the rudders, raised the foresail to the wind, and made for the beach.

BBEBible in Basic English1949

So cutting away the hooks, and letting them go into the sea, and freeing the cords of the guiding-blades, and lifting up the sail to the wind, they went in the direction of the inlet.

Word by word, the decisions they made

ἀγκύραςagkura anchors G45 2 different renderings
anchorsASV BSB DBY DRA FBV KJV LSV MSB NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB YLT
letting them goBBE
ἀνέντεςaniēmi having loosened G447 2 different renderings
loosedGNV KJV LSV NWB ULB YLT
untiedFBV
ζευκτηρίαςzeuktēria ropes G2202 2 different renderings
ropesBSB FBV MSB ULB WEB
cordsBBE
πηδαλίωνpēdalion rudders G4079 2 different renderings
ruddersASV BSB DBY FBV LSV MSB RVA ULB YLT
rudderDRA GNV KJV NWB WEB
ἐπάραντεςepairō having hoisted G1869 3 different renderings
having hoistedLSV YLT
raisedFBV ULB
lifting upBBE
αἰγιαλόν.aigialos shore. G123 2 different renderings
the shoreGNV LSV NWB YLT
shoreDRA KJV

Counted from the translations carried on this site, not from a survey of every English Bible. A rendering shared by many versions is usually inherited rather than independently arrived at — the Tyndale line in particular runs through most of them.


The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank

This is not our own analysis: it is the scholarly syntax tree for the verse, showing how the clause actually holds together.

clauseκαὶAndclauseclauseclause · adverbialnoun phrase · objectτὰςtheἀγκύραςanchorsverbπεριελόντεςhaving cut awayverbεἴωνthey left [them]prepositional phrase · adverbialεἰςinnoun phraseτὴνtheθάλασσανseaclause · adverbialadverbialἅμαat the same timeverbἀνέντεςhaving loosenednoun phrase · objectτὰςthenoun phraseζευκτηρίαςropesnoun phraseτῶνof theπηδαλίωνruddersκαὶAndclauseclause · adverbialverbἐπάραντεςhaving hoistednoun phrase · objectτὸνtheἀρτέμωναforesailnoun phrase · indirect objectτῇto theclauseverbπνεούσῃblowing [wind]verbκατεῖχονthey began makingprepositional phrase · adverbialεἰςfornoun phraseτὸνtheαἰγιαλόνshore

Boxes are the grammarian's groupings — clause, noun phrase, prepositional phrase.


The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac

Every translation is an argument about meaning made by someone who had to commit to one. These two were made while the Greek was still a living language, and they are the oldest opinions we have about what this verse says.

Latin VulgateAD 382–405

Et cum anchoras sustulissent, committebant se mari, simul laxantes juncturas gubernaculorum : et levato artemone secundum auræ flatum, tendebant ad littus.

Jerome revised the Old Latin against the Greek from AD 382; the Latin west read this text for a thousand years.

Syriac Peshittaby AD 400

ܘܦܣܩܘ ܐܘܩܝܢܣ ܡܢ ܐܠܦܐ ܘܐܪܦܝܘ ܐܢܝܢ ܒܝܡܐ ܘܫܪܘ ܪܟܒܐ ܕܣܘܟܢܐ ܘܬܠܘ ܐܪܡܢܘܢ ܙܥܘܪܐ ܠܪܘܚܐ ܕܢܫܒܐ ܘܪܕܝܢ ܗܘܘ ܠܐܦܝ ܝܒܫܐ

The Bible of the Syriac-speaking church, in the language nearest to the Aramaic Jesus spoke.

Shown verse by verse rather than word by word: aligning a Greek word to its Latin or Syriac counterpart automatically would be guesswork, and a wrong alignment is worse than none.


The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say

Eight printed editions of the Greek New Testament, side by side. Where they agree the wording is settled; where a word is missing from an edition it is marked, so you can see the difference rather than take it on trust.

Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

καὶ τὰς ἀγκύρας περιελόντες εἴων εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν, ἅμα ἀνέντες τὰς ζευκτηρίας τῶν πηδαλίων καὶ ἐπάραντες τὸν ἀρτέμωνα τῇ πνεούσῃ κατεῖχον εἰς τὸν αἰγιαλόν.

The standard critical text of the New Testament.

Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

καὶ τὰς ἀγκύρας περιελόντες εἴων εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν, ἅμα ἀνέντες τὰς ζευκτηρίας τῶν πηδαλίων καὶ ἐπάραντες τὸν ἀρτέμωνα τῇ πνεούσῃ κατεῖχον εἰς τὸν αἰγιαλόν.

The previous edition, still widely cited.

SBL Greek New Testament2010 · Michael Holmes

καὶ τὰς ἀγκύρας περιελόντες εἴων εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν, ἅμα ἀνέντες τὰς ζευκτηρίας τῶν πηδαλίων καὶ ἐπάραντες τὸν ἀρτέμωνα τῇ πνεούσῃ κατεῖχον εἰς τὸν αἰγιαλόν.

The Society of Biblical Literature edition, freely licensed.

Westcott–Hort1881 · Westcott and Hort

καὶ τὰς ἀγκύρας περιελόντες εἴων εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν, ἅμα ἀνέντες τὰς ζευκτηρίας τῶν πηδαλίων καὶ ἐπάραντες τὸν ἀρτέμωνα τῇ πνεούσῃ κατεῖχον εἰς τὸν αἰγιαλόν.

The edition that turned scholarship toward the earliest manuscripts.

Tregelles1857–1879 · Samuel Prideaux Tregelles

καὶ τὰς ἀγκύρας περιελόντες εἴων εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν, ἅμα ἀνέντες τὰς ζευκτηρίας τῶν πηδαλίων καὶ ἐπάραντες τὸν ἀρτέμωνα τῇ πνεούσῃ κατεῖχον εἰς τὸν αἰγιαλόν.

An independent critical text built from the oldest witnesses then known.

Tyndale House Greek NT2017 · Tyndale House, Cambridge

καὶ τὰς ἀγκύρας περιελόντες εἴων εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν, ἅμα ἀνέντες τὰς ζευκτηρίας τῶν πηδαλίων καὶ ἐπάραντες τὸν ἀρτέμωνα τῇ πνεούσῃ κατεῖχον εἰς τὸν αἰγιαλόν.

A recent critical edition following documentary evidence closely.

Byzantine majority text2018 · Robinson–Pierpont

καὶ τὰς ἀγκύρας περιελόντες εἴων εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν, ἅμα ἀνέντες τὰς ζευκτηρίας τῶν πηδαλίων καὶ ἐπάραντες τὸν ἀρτέμωνα τῇ πνεούσῃ κατεῖχον εἰς τὸν αἰγιαλόν.

The reading of the majority of surviving manuscripts.

Textus Receptus1550/1894 lineage

καὶ τὰς ἀγκύρας περιελόντες εἴων εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν, ἅμα ἀνέντες τὰς ζευκτηρίας τῶν πηδαλίων καὶ ἐπάραντες τὸν ἀρτέμωνα τῇ πνεούσῃ κατεῖχον εἰς τὸν αἰγιαλόν.

The printed tradition behind the King James Version.

Every witness on this verse all agree
Critical editions
Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993SBL Greek New Testament2010Westcott–Hort1881Tregelles1857–1879Tyndale House Greek NT2017
Byzantine / Majority
Byzantine majority text2018
Received Text
Textus Receptus1550/1894

A witness that read differently would show its variant word here, marked.

Word by word, across the editions

Every edition agrees. All 8 printed editions — Nestle-Aland 28, Nestle-Aland 27, SBLGNT, Westcott-Hort, Tregelles, Tyndale House 2017, Textus Receptus (KJV), Byzantine majority — carry every word of this verse, in the same order, with no difference that any translator would render differently.


The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with

This is a map of two things, both counted rather than judged. Company kept: which words stand within three words of each of these, anywhere in the Greek New Testament — the thicker the line, the more often the pair meet compared with chance. Built from: the words a word is made out of, taken from its own Strong’s entry. It is not a map of meaning: nothing here claims two words mean the same thing. Click any circle to see the numbers behind it.

Acts 27:40καίAndAndκαίthetheἄγκυραanchorsanchorsἄγκυραπεριαιρέωhaving cut having cut awayπεριαιρέωἐάωthey were lthey were leaviἐάωεἰςininεἰςthetheθάλασσαsea,sea,θάλασσαἅμαat the sameat the same timἅμαἀνίημιhaving looshaving loosenedἀνίημιthetheζευκτηρίαropesropesζευκτηρίαof theof theπηδάλιονruddersruddersπηδάλιονκαίAndAndκαίἐπαίρωhaving hoishaving hoistedἐπαίρωthetheἀρτέμωνforesailforesailἀρτέμωνto theto theπνέωblowing [wiblowing [wind]πνέωκατέχωthey were mthey were makinκατέχωεἰςforforεἰςthetheαἰγιαλόςshore.shore.αἰγιαλόςἐπίPrep. on, Prep. on, to, aἐπίπερίPrep. abouPrep. about, coπερίἀνάPrep. and,Prep. and, apieἀνάκατάPrep. downPrep. down fromκατάἀγκάληn.f. an arn.f. an armἀγκάληἔαIj. an intIj. an interjecἔαζυγόςn.m. a yokn.m. a yoke, heζυγόςπέδηn.f. a shan.f. a shackleπέδηαἴρωv. I raisev. I raise, lifαἴρωἄρτιAdv now, jAdv now, just nἄρτιψύχωv. I cool,v. I cool, growψύχωοὐNeg.prt. nNeg.prt. no, noοὐἹεροσόλυμαn.f. & n.nn.f. & n.n. JerἹεροσόλυμαεἰσέρχομαιv. I go inv. I go in, comεἰσέρχομαιἄνεμοςn.m. the wn.m. the windἄνεμοςὡςAdv as, liAdv as, like asὡςἐκPrep. fromPrep. from out,ἐκπέρανAdv over, Adv over, beyonπέραν
meets it a little oftener than chancemeets it far oftener than chancebuilt from the same roottwo words of the verse share ita word of this versea related word

Lexicons — every word in Acts 27:40

One dossier per word, with every reference work grouped by kind — Greek lexicons, morphology, Bible dictionaries, topical chains and the English of the translators themselves. The verse sits at the head of each block with the word under study lit, so you never lose your place. The panel above gives the short answer; this is the long one, and it is the part of the page worth indexing.

Every entry below is the lexicographer's own text. Imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, the full Liddell-Scott-Jones, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate LSJ, Robinson and Packard on the Greek, Webster and Cawdrey on the English the translators were using. Where a cell says a work has no entry, that work genuinely has none for this word.

And the anchors having cut away they were leaving [them] in the sea, at the same time having loosened the ropes of the rudders And having hoisted the foresail to the blowing [wind] they were making for the shore.
καὶkai And G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίAnd8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

And the anchors having cut away they were leaving [them] in the sea, at the same time having loosened the ropes of the rudders And having hoisted the foresail to the blowing [wind] they were making for the shore.
τὰςho the G3588 Article · accusative · plural · feminine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-APF — Article · accusative · plural · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-APF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Feminine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

And the anchors having cut away they were leaving [them] in the sea, at the same time having loosened the ropes of the rudders And having hoisted the foresail to the blowing [wind] they were making for the shore.
ἀγκύραςagkura anchors G45 Noun · accusative · plural · feminine
4× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
An anchor is a device used to stabilize a ship, and it is also used figuratively in the Bible to describe hope and stability, as seen in Acts 27:29 and Hebrews 6:19.
Amplified meaning
letting them go, abandoning them
Tyndale gloss
anchor
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἄγκυρα (i.e., *ankura*) means 'anchor' and is derived from a root meaning 'bend.' It appears in the New Testament in Acts 27:29, 30, 40 and Hebrews 6:19, where it is used both literally and figuratively to signify hope as a safeguard. The lexicons note various uses in ancient literature, including expressions related to casting and weighing anchor.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

** ἄγκυρα, -ας, ἡ (< ἄγκος, a bend), [in Sm.: Je 52:18*;]

an anchor: Ac 27:29, 30 40; fig. (MM, VGT, s.v.), He 6:19.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἄγκυρα, -as, 7, [see ἀγκάλη], an anchor — [ancient anchors resembled modern in form: were of iron, provided with a stock, and with two teeth-like extremities often but by no means always without flukes ; see Roschach in Daremberg and Saglio’s Dict. des Antiq. (1873) p. 267; Guhl and Koner p. 258]: ῥίπτειν to cast (Lat. jacere), Acts xxvii. 29 ; ἐκτείνειν, vs. 30; περιαιρεῖν, vs. 40. Figuratively, any stay or safeguard: as hope, Heb. vi. 19; Eur. Hee. 78 (80); Heliod. vii. p. 352 (350).

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἄγκυρα. P Lond 1164 (4)® (a.p. 212) (=TIII. p. 164) ἀνκύραις σιδηραῖς δυσὶ σὺν σπάθαις σιδηραῖς (the two teeth of the anchor), Sy// 588.171 (11,8.6.) ἄγκυρα σιδηρᾶ. For the figurative sense, as Heb 61%, cf. a. γήρως, 7G XII. vii. 123 ὁ).

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἄγκυρα (agkura) — anchor.

ἄγκῡρα, ἡ,

anchor, [Refs 7th c.BC+]; ἄ. βάλλεσθαι, καθιέναι, μεθιέναι, ἀΦιέναι to cast anchor, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἄ. αἴρειν, αἴρεσθαι to weigh anchor, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐπ᾽ ἀγκυρέων ὁρμεῖν ride at anchor, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; prov, ἀγαθαὶ πέλοντ᾽.. δύ᾽ ἄγκυραι 'tis good to have 'two strings to your bow', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐπὶ τῆς αὐτῆς (i.e. ἀγκύρας) ὁρμεῖν τοῖς πολλοῖς, i.e. 'to be in the same boat' with the many, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οἴκων ἄ., of a son, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἱερὰ ἄ., last hope, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

II. pruning-hook, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

III. ={αἰδοῖον}, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἄγκυρα

agkura

from the same as 43; an "anchor" (as crooked):--anchor.

see GREEK for 43

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἄγκυρα, ας, ἡ

n.f.

an anchor

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἄγκυρα ankyra 4x

an anchor, Acts 27:29, 30, 40; Heb. 6:19*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἄγκυρα ἄγκος Lat. ancora, an anchor, first in Alcae. and Theogn., for in Hom. we hear only of εὐναί, i. e. stones used as anchors; ἄγκυραν βάλλεσθαι, καθιέναι, μεθιέναι, ἀφιέναι to cast anchor, Pind., Hdt., etc.; so, ἐπὶ δυοῖν ἀγκύραιν ὁρμεῖν, i. e. "to have two strings to one's bow," Dem.; cf. ὀχέω; ἐπὶ τῆς αὐτῆς (sc. ἀγκύρας) ὁρμεῖν τοῖς πολλοῖς, i. e. "to be in the same boat" with the many, id. Dem.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-APF — Noun · accusative · plural · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-APF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Thompson Chain Reference topics
Into Englishhow translators actually render it
75%anchors
anchors75% · 3×anchor25% · 1×

4 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object75%adverbial25%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 4 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ῥίπτωI throw, cast, toss
πρύμναthe stern of a s
πρῷραthe prow of a ship
ἐκ
Article the
καίand, even, also,
ὡςas, like as, how, wh
ὅς
ἄγκυραanchors
what comes after →
τέσσαρεςfour
εὔχομαιI pray, wish
μέλλωI am about to
ἐκτείνωI stretch out, c
περιαιρέωI strip off, cast of
ἐάωI allow, permit,
ἔχωI have, hold, posses
Article the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἄγκυρα · 4× in the New Testament
Acts Hebrews
Across the New Testament2 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Posterity of Cain 142c. AD 40

τὸ γὰρ ἄγκυραν ἢ πλάτην ἢ πηδάλιον γεωπόνῳ ἢ ἄροτρα καὶ σκαπάνην κυβερνήτῃ ἢ λύραν μὲν ἰατρῷ, μουσικῷ δὲ τὰ κατὰ τὴν χειρουργίαν δωρεῖσθαι ὄργανα καταγέλαστον, εἰ μὴ καὶ διψῶσι μὲν πολυτελῆ σιτία, πεινῶσι δὲ πολὺν ἄκρατον ἐπιφέρειν δεῖ πρὸς…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 15.333c. AD 75–95

κεῖται μὲν γὰρ ἡ πόλις ἐν τῇ Φοινίκῃ κατὰ τὸν εἰς Αἴγυπτον παράπλουν Ἰόππης μεταξὺ καὶ Δώρων, πολισμάτια ταῦτʼ ἐστὶν παράλια δύσορμα διὰ τὰς κατὰ λίβα προσβολάς, αἳ ἀεὶ τὰς ἐκ τοῦ πόντου θῖνας ἐπὶ τὴν ᾐόνα σύρουσαι καταγωγὴν οὐ διδόασιν, ἀλλʼ ἔστιν…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 6th c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 5th c. AD
O.Did. 407DidymoiAD 110–AD 115

Ἀγκυρᾶς Ὡρίωνι τῶι πατρὶ χαίρειν· τίνα ἔχω ἐν τῷ πραισιδίῳ ἐκτὸς σοῦ; σὺ γὰρ καὶ

O.Did. 406DidymoiAD 115–AD 140

πρὸς σέ· σοὶ γὰρ τὰ ἐμὰ πάντα ἐπίστευσα καὶ ἀποδώσεις μοι τὴν παρακαταθήκην. ἀσπάζου Ἀγκυρᾶν καὶ Εὔβιον. ἔρρωσο εἴ τις ἔχει πρᾶγμα πρὸς αὐτὴν ὧδε Λογγεινᾶς ἀναβαίνει, ὁ δεκουρίων,

P.Giss.Univ. 3 22AD 284–AD 304

ἐν πλοίῳ ἡμῶν, ἡ δὲ σημείωσις τοῦ αὐτοῦ κνιδίου χωρὶς τῆς σημειώσεως ἡμῶν ἔχει ἄγκυραν, ἔχον ἀργυρίου τάλαντα τεσσαρακοντα τάλαντα μ. τὰ δʼ ἄλλα τὸ ἓν ἔχον ἀργυρίου τάλαντα

And the anchors having cut away they were leaving [them] in the sea, at the same time having loosened the ropes of the rudders And having hoisted the foresail to the blowing [wind] they were making for the shore.
περιελόντεςperiaireō having cut away G4014 Verb · second aorist · active · participle · nominative · plural · masculine
4× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To take away something that surrounds, like removing a veil or casting off an anchor, as seen in Acts 27:40. It can also mean to expiate or remove sin, as in Hebrews 10:11. This concept is used to describe God's action of removing sin.
Tyndale gloss
to take away
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

περιαιρέω is built from the prefix περί meaning 'around' and a root meaning 'to take away.' It covers a range of meanings from physically removing something that surrounds, like an anchor or a garment, to metaphorically expiating sin. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts such as 2 Corinthians 3:16 and Hebrews 10:11, where it signifies taking away guilt or hope.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

περι-αιρέω, -ῶ,

[in LXX chiefly for סוּר hi.;]

to take away that which surrounds, take away, take off (τείχη, Hdt., Thuc.; χιτῶνα, Plat.; δακτύλιον, Ge 41:42, cf. σφρηγῖδα, Hdt., ii, 151): τ. κάλυμμα, pass., II Co 3:16; as nautical term (RV, cast off), ἀγκύρας, Ac 27:40; absol., to cast loose: Ac 28:13. Metaph., to take away entirely: ἐλπίς, pass., Ac 27:20; ἁμαρτίας, He 10:11.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

περι-αιρέω, -ῶ : 2 aor. inf. περιελεῖν, [ptep. plur. περιe\dvres; Pass., pres. 3 pers. sing. περιαιρεῖται] ; impf. 3 pers. sing. περιῃρεῖτο; fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for VO; a. to take away that which surrounds or en= velops a thing (cf. περί, III. 1]: τὸ κάλυμμα, pass., 2 Co. ili. 16 (πορφύραν, 2 Mace. iv. 38; τὸν δακτύλιον, Gen. xli. 42; Joseph. antt. 19, 2, 3); ἀγκύρας, the anchors from both sides of the ship, [R. V. casting off], Acts xxvii. 40 ; [2 aor. ptep., absol., in a nautical sense, to cast loose, Acts xxviii. 13 WII (al. περιελθόντες]. b. metaph. to take away altogether or entirely: τὰς ἁμαρτίας (with which one is, as it were, enveloped), the guilt of sin, i. e. to expiate perfectly, Heb. x. 11; τὴν ἐλπίδα, pass., Acts xxvii. 20.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

περιαιρέω in its literal sense ‘‘take away,” “‘remove,’’ may be illustrated from BGU IV. 1061!® (B.c. 14) ἐξέδυσαν kal περιείλοντο αὐτοῦ πόκους ἐρίων py. Cf. P Tebt II. 300! (A.D. 151), where instructions are given that a priest who had died should be struck off the list—émS(S0(= ὠ)μι (= ὅγπως περιερεθῇ [τ]οῦτο τὸ ὄνομα, BGU IV. 1085-7 (ii/A.D.) ἀξιούντων περιαιρεθῆναι αὐτὸν τῆς προκηρύξεωϊς, and the corresponding use of the act. in P Flor III, 3087 (A.D. 203) ἀξιῶ αὐτὸν περιελεῖν ἐκ τῶν δημοσίων λόγων : see also Ac 2818 and Field Motes, p. 149f. For the metaph. usage, as in Ac 272°, cf. M. Anton. xii. 2 τὸν πολὺν περισπασμὸν σεαυτοῦ περιαιρήσεις, “thou wilt free thyself from the most of thy distracting care”…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

περιαιρέω (periaireō) — to take away.

περιαιρ-έω,

aorist περιεῖλον [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—take away something that surrounds, strip off, remove, with accusative of things, τεῖχος Hdt.[same place],[Refs 5th c.BC+]; π. τὸν κέραμον taking off the earthen jar into which the gold had been run, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; δέρματα σωμάτων π. strip skins off from.., [Refs 5th c.BC+]; simply, take away from, τῶν πολεμικῶν τὸ μελετᾶν [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—middle, take off from oneself, π. τὴν κυνέην, τὴν σφρηγῖδα, take off one's helmet, one's signet-ring, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; βυβλίον περιαιρεόμενος taking [the cover] off one's letter, i. e. opening it, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: but middle is frequently used like active, strip off, take away, τὸ περιελέσθαι αὐτῶν τὰ ὅπλα [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—passive, to be taken off, τοὐπίβλημ᾽ ἐπεὶ περιῃρέθη [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τοῦ ἄλλου περιῃρημένου when the rest has been…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

περιαιρέω

periaireo

from 4012 and 138 (including its alternate); to remove all around,

i.e. unveil, cast off (anchor); figuratively, to expiate:--take away

(up).

see GREEK for 4012

see GREEK for 138

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

περιαιρέω

v.

I strip off, cast off

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

περιαιρέω periaireō 5x

to take off, lift off, remove, 2 Cor. 3:16; to cast off, Acts 27:40; met. to cut off hope, Acts 27:20; met. to take away sin, remove the guilt of sin, make expiation for sin, Heb. 10:11

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

περιαιρέω fut. ήσω perf. -ῄρηκα aor2 περι-εῖλον inf. -ελεῖν to take off something that surrounds, take off an outer coat, take away, strip off, τὰ τείχη Hdt., Thuc.; π. τὸν κέραμον taking off the earthen jar into which the gold had been run, Hdt.:—Mid. to take off from oneself, π. τὴν κυνέην to take off one's helmet, Hdt.; βιβλίον περιαιρεόμενος taking [the cover] off the letter, i. e. opening it, id. Hdt.:—but Mid. often just like Act. to strip off, take away, Xen., Plat.:—Pass. to be taken off, τοῦ ἄλλου περιῃρημένου when the rest has been taken away, Thuc.

Pass. also c. acc. rei, to be stript of a thing, περιῃρημένοι χρήματα καὶ συμμάχους Dem.; τοὺς στεφάνους περιῄρηνται id. Dem.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-2AAP-NPM — Verb · second aorist · active · participle · nominative · plural · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-2AAP-NPM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
20%abandoned
abandoned20% · 1×having cut away20% · 1×having taken off20% · 1×taken away20% · 1×take away20% · 1×

5 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 5 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 4 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
λοιπόςleft, left behind, t
ἐπίκειμαιI lie upon, am i
ἄγκυραan anchor
Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
πρός
δύναμαιI am powerful, am ab
οὐδέποτεNeg
περιαιρέωhaving cut away
what comes after →
ἐλπίςhope, expectation
πᾶςall, the whole,
ἐάωI allow, permit, lea
εἰς
Article the
κάλυμμαa veil
ἁμαρτίαa sin

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπεριαιρέω · 4× in the New Testament
Acts 2 Corinthians Hebrews
Across the New Testament3 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 33 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus
Philo of AlexandriaOn Noah's Work as a Planter 99c. AD 40

ἐπεὶ οὖν ὁ ἄρτι εἰσαγόμενος μακρὰν τοῦ τέλους ἀφέστηκεν, εἰκότως φυτεύσαντι αὐτῷ προστέτακται περιελεῖν τὴν ἀκαθαρσίαν τοῦ φυτευθέντος.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 19.185c. AD 75–95

ἀναπηδήσας δέ τις Τρεβέλλιος Μάξιμος περιαιρεῖται τὸν δακτύλιον τοῦ Σεντίου, λίθος δὲ εἰκόνα Γαΐου ἐγγεγλυμμένος ἐδεσμεύετο αὐτῷ, καὶ σπουδῇ τῶν λεγομένων καὶ ὧν ἐπενόει πράξειν, ὅπερ ᾤετο, ἐν λήθῃ γεγονότι καὶ ἡ μὲν γλυφὴ κατάγνυται.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC
P.Cair. Zen. 4 59730Philadelphia (Arsinoites)253 BC

γ ἐκ τῆς ἰδιοσπόρου χμ γ ιβ γίνονται ἀρτάβαι χοε δ ἐλάσσω ὃ δεῖ περιελεῖν Ἡρακλείδην ἀρτάβαις κε δ κρότωνος ξα 𐅵 Κλείταρχος δὲ ἐκ τῆς ἰδιοσπόρου νθ ιβ

P.Flor. 3 308HermopolitesAD 203

ας ἐκ τῶν αὐτῶν γονέων ἐτελεύτησεν τετελεκὼς πάντα τὰ ὑπὲρ αὑτοῦ δημόσια, ἀξιῶ αὐτὸν περιελεῖν ἐκ τῶν δημοσίων λόγων, ὡς καθήκει καὶ ὀμνύω τὴν τῶν κυρίων ἡμῶν Αὐτοκρατόρων Σεουήρου

ZPE 47 (1982), p. 229-232HermopolitesAD 229

ἀπὸ τῆς αὐτῆς κώμης ἐτελεύτησαν ὑπὲρ ὧν ἐτελέσθη ἃ καθήκει δημόσια μέχρι νῦν, ἀξιῶ περιελεῖν αὐτοὺς ἐκ τῶν δημοσίων λόγων ὡς καθήκει καὶ ὀμνύω τὴν τοῦ κυρίου Αὐρηλίου Σεουήρου

And the anchors having cut away they were leaving [them] in the sea, at the same time having loosened the ropes of the rudders And having hoisted the foresail to the blowing [wind] they were making for the shore.
εἴωνeaō they were leaving [them] G1439 Verb · imperfect · active · indicative · third person · plural
11× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This verb means to allow or permit something, often used in the sense of leaving something alone, as in Matthew 24:43 and Acts 14:16.
Tyndale gloss
to allow
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἐάω (*eao*) means to let, permit, or leave alone. It is used in various contexts, such as allowing actions to occur or letting something be. In the New Testament, it appears in verses like Matthew 24:43 and Luke 22:51. The lexicons note its passive forms and usage with infinitives, but there is no significant disagreement among them.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐάω, -ῶ,

[in LXX for רפה hi., etc. ;]

to let, permit: c. acc., c. inf., c. acc. et inf. (M, Pr., 205): Mt 24:43, Lk 4:41 22:51, Ac 14:16 16:7 19:30 23:32 27:32 28:4, I Co 10:13.

to let alone, leave: ἀγκύρας, Ac 27:40 (cf. προσ-εάω).†

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐάω (eaō) — to allow.

ἐάω,

contraction ἐῶ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Epic dialect εἰῶ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; infinitive ἐάαν [Refs 8th c.BC+]imperfect εἴων,-ας, -α, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect and Epic dialect ἔων [Refs 8th c.BC+], etc.: future ἐάσω [ᾱ] [Refs], etc.: aorist εἴᾱσα (εἴᾰσεν is variant for{εἴᾱς}' in [Refs]; Epic dialect ἔᾱσα [Refs]: perfect εἴᾱκα [Refs 4th c.BC+] —passive, future ἐάσομαι in passive sense, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist εἰάθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]: perfect passive εἴᾱμαι [Refs 5th c.BC+] never uses the augment in this Verb. [ᾰ in present and imperfect, ᾱ in future and aorist even in Ionic dialect (so probably in [Refs 6th c.BC+]; forms with -ασς- occur as variants in [Refs 8th c.BC+]. Synizesis occurs in 3rd.pers. singular ἐᾷ [Refs 8th c.BC+] subjunctive ἐῶμεν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also in Trag., in imperative ἔα [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—suffer, permit, with accusative person…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐάω

eao

of uncertain affinity; to let be, i.e. permit or leave alone:--commit,

leave, let (alone), suffer. See also 1436.

see GREEK for 1436

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐάω

v.

I allow, permit, leave

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐάω eaō 11x

to let, allow, permit, suffer to be done, Mt. 24:43; Lk. 4:41; to let be, let alone, desist from, stop, Lk. 22:51; to commit a ship to the sea, let her drive, Acts 27:40

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐάω to let, suffer, allow, permit, Lat. sinere, c. acc. pers. et inf., Hom., attic:—Pass. to be given up, Soph.

οὐκ ἐᾶν not to suffer, and then to forbid, hinder, prevent, c. acc. et. inf., Hom., etc.: often an inf. may be supplied, οὐκ ἐάσει σε τοῦτο will not allow thee [to do] this, Soph.

to let alone, let be, c. acc., Hom., etc.;—absol., ἔασον let be, Aesch.:—Pass., ἡ δ᾽ οὖν ἐάσθω Soph.

in same sense, c. inf., κλέψαι μὲν ἐάσομεν we will have done with stealing, Il.; θεὸς τὸ μὲν δώσει, τὸ δ᾽ ἐάσει [sc. δοῦναι] he will give one thing, the other he will let alone, Od.; v. χαίρω fin.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-IAI-3P — Verb · imperfect · active · indicative · third person · plural
imperfect active indicative — a continuing action in past time.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-IAI-3P Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Imperfect Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Plural

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
27%allowed
allowed27% · 3×did allow9% · 1×allowing9% · 1×having allowed9% · 1×they were leaving9% · 1×has permitted9% · 1×will allow9% · 1×he allowing9% · 1×other renderings9% · 1×

11 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 9 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 11 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
οὐNeg
ἐπιτιμάωI rebuke, chide,καίand, even, also,δῆμοςthe people, mult
ἄνDisj
οὐNeg
λέγωI say, speak
ἸησοῦςJesus
γενεάa generation
παροίχομαιI pass away time
ἐπαύριονtomorrow
δέbut, on the othe
ἐάωthey were leaving [them]11×
what comes after →
αὐτός
Article theλαλέωI speak, sayἐκπίπτωI fall out, fall
διορύσσωI dig through, break
Article the
ἕωςuntil, as far as
οὗτος
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
Article the
Article the
ἱππεύςa mounted soldie

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐάω · 11× in the New Testament
Acts Luke 1 Corinthians Matthew
Across the New Testament4 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 2.34c. AD 40

διὸ καὶ Μωυσῆς φησιν ὅτι „οὐκ ἐάσει τὸν ὀλοθρεύοντα εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὰς οἰκίας ὑμῶν πατάξαι“ (Exod.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 2.221c. AD 75–95

τῷ γὰρ ὕδατι τὴν διὰ τῶν πλεγμάτων ἀποφράττειν εἴσοδον ἡ ἄσφαλτος πέφυκεν, ἐντιθέασι τὸ παιδίον καὶ κατὰ τοῦ ποταμοῦ βαλόντες εἴασαν ἐπὶ τῷ θεῷ τὴν σωτηρίαν αὐτοῦ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 2nd c. AD 3rd c. BC 3rd c. AD 2nd c. BC

ω … εια … … καὶ παρακέχρηκεν αὐτὴν πρ … … καὶ ἧκαν ἐπὶ ἡμᾶς καὶ παρακεκλήκασιν

PSI 8 897 (2)OxyrhynchosAD 93

τῆς κάτω τοπαρχίας Ἀπολλοφάνει Θ … ου τοῦ δεῖνα … Νεοκοσμίῳ τῷ καὶ … εια … χίῳ μητρὸς Ἀρσινόης τῆς τοῦ δεῖνα … παρακεχωρηκέναι αὐτῷ ἀκολούθως τοῖς ᾠκονομημένοις διὰ

P.Stras. 4 271AD 207–AD 208

μετόχοις … … κώμης β … … αστις Πακω … διεγράφη ὑπὲρ τῶν … ειων ἀριθμήσεως

And the anchors having cut away they were leaving [them] in the sea, at the same time having loosened the ropes of the rudders And having hoisted the foresail to the blowing [wind] they were making for the shore.
εἰςeis in G1519 Preposition
1,766× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means toward or into, indicating direction or purpose, as seen in Matthew 8:23 and Mark 1:45. It can also imply a sense of movement or action. The KJV translates it in various ways.
Tyndale gloss
toward
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

εἰς is a preposition meaning 'into' or 'to,' used with the accusative case. It indicates direction, entrance, or limit, applicable to place, time, and figurative purposes. The New Testament frequently employs it to express movement toward locations or states, as seen in passages like Matthew 8:23. It can also denote relationships or results, such as 'for' or 'among.'

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

εἰς,

prep. c. acc.,

expressing entrance, direction, limit, into, unto, to, upon, towards, for, among (Lat. in, c. acc.).

Of place.

After verbs of motion;

of entrance into: Mt 8:23 9:7, Mk 1:45, Lk 2:15 8:31, al.;

of approach, to or towards: Mk 11:1, Lk 6:8 19:28, Jo 11:31 21:6, al.;

before pl. and collective nouns, among: Mk 4:7 8:19, 20, Lk 11:49, Jo 21:23, al.;

Of a limit reached, unto, on, upon: Mt 8:18, 21:1, Mk…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

εἰς, a Prep. governing the Accusative, and denoting entrance into, or direction and limit: into, to, towards, for, among. It is used A. Property I. of Place, after verbs of going, coming, sailing, flying, falling, living, leading, carrying, throwing, sending, etc. ; 1. of a place entered, or of entrance into a place, into; and 8. it stands before nouns designating an open place, a hollow thing, or one in which an object can be hidden: as εἰς (τὴν) πόλιν, Mt. xxvi. 18; xxviii. 11; Mk. i. 45, and often; εἰς r. οἶκον, Mt. ix. 7; συναγωγήν, Acts xvii. 10; πλοῖον, Mt. viii. 23; Jn. vi. 17; Acts xxi. 6; θάλασσαν, Mt. xvii. 27; ἄβυσσον, Lk. viii. 31; οὐρανόν, Lk. ii. 15; κόσμον, In. 1. 9; iii. 19, ete.; τὰ ἴδια, Jn. i. 11; xvi. 32; Acts xxi. 6; ἀποθήκην, Mt. iii. 12; εἰς ra ὦτα, Lk. i. 44; εἰς τὰς ζώνας or ζώνην, Mt. x. 9; Mk. vi. 8, etc.; εἰς ἀέρα, 1 Co. xiv. 9; eis πῦρ, Mk. ix. 22, ete.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

εἰς ἁλιέων εἰς ᾿Αλεξάνδριί[αν (P Oxy II. 2943 = Selections, Ρ- 34): see further Pro/eg. pp. 234 f., 245. For εἰς in the wide sense in which we use ‘‘for” we may cite such passages as P Lille I. 261 (iii/B.c.) ἔγραψάς μοι περὶ τῆς εἰς THY σησαμείαν γῆς, 20." ἕως ἂν] μάθωμεν περὶ τῶν κ[εχρ]ηματισμένων εἰς τὸν νομόν, P Petr II. 11 (1)" (mid. iii/B.c.) (= Witkowski*, p. 8) ἀπὸ τούτου τὸ μὲν ἥμυσυ εἰς τὰ δέοντα ὑπελιπόμην, τὸ δὲ λοιπὸν εἰς τὸ δάνειον κατέβαλον, P Lond 43? (ii/B.c.) (=I. p. 48, Witkowski’, p- 110) ἕξεις ἐφόδιον εἰς τὸ γῆρας, P Tebt I. 577 (8.6. 118) προστε]τάχασι δὲ καὶ τὰ els τὴν ταφὴν τοῦ “Amos, P Oxy I. 379 (A.D. 149) (= Selections, p. 49) ἐγένετο ἐνθάδε ἡ τροφεῖτις εἰς υἱὸν tod ΤΠεσούριος, ‘‘there was concluded here the nursing-contract for the son of Pesouris”; and the recurring formulae in a private account of ς. A.D. 15 τό. 1V. 736° θρύων εἰς τοὺς ἄρτους (ὀβολοὶ δύο)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εἰς (eis) — toward.

ἐν εἰς

or ἐς, PREP. WITH ACC. ONLY:—both forms are found in [Refs 8th c.BC+], Ionic dialect poets, and early metrical Inscrr.; ἐς is best attested in [Refs 5th c.BC+], and is found in nearly all early Ionic dialect Inscrr. (except [Refs 5th c.BC+]; and usually in Attic dialect Prose (except [Refs 5th c.BC+] is used before vowels for the sake of meter; ἐς was retained in the phrases ἐς κόρακας (whence the Verb σκορακίζω), ἐς μακαρίαν. Aeolic dialect poets have εἰς before vowels, ἐς before consonants, and this is given as the rule in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; compare ἐν, ἰν. The diphthong is genuine in Aeolic dialect εἰς, but spurious in Attic dialect-Ionic dialect) Radical sense into, and then more loosely, to:

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

εἰς

eis

a primary preposition; to or into (indicating the point reached or

entered), of place, time, or (figuratively) purpose (result, etc.);

also in adverbial phrases:--(abundant-)ly, against, among, as, at,

(back-)ward, before, by, concerning, + continual, + far more

exceeding, for (intent, purpose), fore,

+ forth, in (among, at, unto, -so much that, -to), to the

intent that, + of one mind, + never, of, (up-)on, + perish, + set at

one again, (so) that, therefore(-unto), throughout, til, to (be, the

end, -ward), (here-)until(-to), ...ward, (where-)fore, with. Often

used in composition with the same general import, but only with verbs

(etc.) expressing motion (literally or figuratively).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

εἰς

Prep.

into, in, among, till, for

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

εἰς

into, to c. acc.

PREP. WITH ACC. ONLY. Radical sense, into, and then to:

OF PLACE, the commonest usage, εἰς ἅλα into or to the sea, Hom., etc.:—properly opposed to ἐκ, ἐς σφυρὸν ἐκ πτέρνης from head to foot, Il.; εἰς ἔτος ἐξ ἔτεος from year to year, Theocr.:—then, with all Verbs implying motion or direction, ἰδεῖν εἰς οὐρανόν Il.; εἰς ὦπα ἰδέσθαι to look in the face, id. Il.:—in Hom. and Hdt. also c. acc. pers., where the attic use ὡς, πρός, παρά.

with Verbs which express rest in a place, when a previous motion into or to it is implied, ἐς μέγαρον κατέθηκε, i. e. he brought it into the house, and put it there, Od.; παρεῖναι ἐς τόπον to go to a place and be there, Hdt.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

A principal thing to notice about this preposition, which in the King James Version represents about 16 Hebrew and as many Greek words and prepositions, is that, in hundreds of cases (especially in the Old Testament, but frequently also in the New Testament) in the Revised Version (British and American) the rendering is changed to more exact forms ("to," "unto," "by," "upon," "at," "with," "among," "for," "throughout," etc.; compare e.g. Ge 6:16; 13:8; 17:7,9,12; 18:1; Ex 8:17; Le 1:9, etc.); while, nearly as often, "in" is substituted for divergent forms of the King James Version (e.g. Ge 2:14; 17:11; 31:54; 40:7; 49:17; Ex…

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 9c. AD 40

τὸ δὲ παθητὸν ἄψυχον καὶ ἀκίνητον ἐξ ἑαυτοῦ, κινηθὲν δὲ καὶ σχηματισθὲν καὶ ψυχωθὲν ὑπὸ τοῦ νοῦ μετέβαλεν εἰς τὸ τελειότατον ἔργον, τόνδε τὸν κόσμον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅτι λιμοῦ τὴν Χαναναίαν καταλαβόντος εἰς Αἴγυπτον ἀπῆρε καὶ διατρίψας ἐν αὐτῇ τινα χρόνον ὑπέστρεψεν ὀπίσω.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD 2nd c. BC
P.Grenf. 2 33Pathyris101 BC

καὶ τοῖς μετόχοις γῆς σιτοφόρου λεγομένης Νεχθαραῦτι θεοῦ μεγάλου παρὰ τῶν ἱερέων ἐτῶν δέκα εἰς τὰ ἐνλιπόντα αὐτῷ ἑτέρων , τεσσάρων εἰς συμπλήρωσιν ἐτῶν πέντε , ὥστε γεωργῆσαι ἧς

BGU 3 999Pathyris100 BC

καὶ ἀπηλιώτου τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς Εὐνόου οἰκίας λιβὸς ῥύμη ἐφ ᾧ ἀνοίξει τὴν θύραν εἰς τὴν Ὀρσηοῦς οἰκίαν ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Πετεσοῦχος Νεχθανούπιος ὡς ἐτῶν

P.Adl. 17Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC

ος, βορρᾶ γῆ Σχώτου τοῦ Τρύφωνος, ἀπηλιώτου τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς γῆς, λιβὸς ἡ φέρουσα εἰς τὸ Κρόνειον ὁδός, ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου Πέρσης τῆς

And the anchors having cut away they were leaving [them] in the sea, at the same time having loosened the ropes of the rudders And having hoisted the foresail to the blowing [wind] they were making for the shore.
τὴνho the G3588 Article · accusative · singular · feminine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-ASF — Article · accusative · singular · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-ASF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

And the anchors having cut away they were leaving [them] in the sea, at the same time having loosened the ropes of the rudders And having hoisted the foresail to the blowing [wind] they were making for the shore.
θάλασσαν,thalassa sea, G2281 Noun · accusative · singular · feminine
91× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for sea, used in the Bible to describe large bodies of water like the Mediterranean or Red Sea, as seen in Acts 10:6 and 1 Corinthians 10:1-2.
Amplified meaning
the Mediterranean, a large body of water
Tyndale gloss
sea
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

θάλασσα (thalassa) means 'the sea' and is often used in the New Testament to refer to various bodies of water, including the Mediterranean and the Red Sea. It can also denote an inland lake, such as the Sea of Galilee. The term appears in several verses, including Matthew 23:15 and Acts 7:36. Some sources note its connection to the idea of agitation, but interpretations vary.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — θάλασσα, πέλαγος from a scan

THE connexion of θάλασσα with the verb ταράσσειν, that it means properly the agitated or disturbed, finds favour with 1 I cannot regard as an evidence of such reconsecration the wellknown words of Ignatius, Ad Rom. 7: ὃ ἐμὸς ἔρως ἐσταύρωται. It is far more consistent with the genius of these Ignatian Epistles to take épws subjectively here, ‘ My love of the world is crucified,’ .6. with Christ ; rather than objectively, ‘ Christ, the object of my love, is crucified.’ 2 Consult on ἔρως the noble fragment from Sophocles, preserved by Stobeeus : Νόσημ᾽ ἔρωτος τοῦτ᾽ ἐφίμερον κακόν. ἔχοιμ᾽ ἂν αὐτὸ μὴ κακῶς ἀπεικάσαι, ὅταν πάγου φανέντος αἰθρίου χεροῖν κρύσταλλον ἁρπάσωσι παῖδες ἀσταγῆ. τὰ πρῶτ᾽ ἔχουσιν ἡδονὰς ποταινίους, τέλος δ᾽ ὃ χυμὸς οὔθ᾽ ὅπως ἀφῇ θέλει οὔτ᾽ ἐν χεροῖν τὸ κτῆμα σύμφορον μένειν. οὕτω γε τοὺς ἐρῶντας αὑτὸς ἵμερος δρᾶν καὶ τὸ μὴ δρᾶν πολλάκις προΐεται. §xul1 SYNONYMS OF THE…

Read the full entry →
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

θάλασσα, -ης, ἡ,

[in LXX chiefly for יָם;]

the sea: Mt 23:15, Mk 11:23, Lk 21:25, Ro 9:27, He 11:12, Ja 1:6, Ju 13, Re 7:1, al.; τὸ πέλαγος τῆς θ. (v. Tr., ut infr.), Mt 18:6; ὁ οὐρανὸς κ. ἡ γῆ κ. ἡ θ., of the whole world, Ac 4:24, al. (Hg 2:7); θ. ὑαλίνη, Re 4:6 15:2; of the Mediterranean, Ac…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

θάλασσα [cf. B. 7], -ns, 7, (akin to ads [better, allied to ταράσσω etc., from its tossing; ef. Vanitek, p. 303]; Sept. for D>), [fr. Hom. down], the sea; [on its distinetion from πέλαγος see the latter word]; a. univ.: Mt. xxiii. 15; Mk. xi. 23; Lk. xvii. 2,6; xxi. 25; Ro. ix. 27; 2Co. xi. 26; Heb. xi. 12;,Jas.i.6; Jude 13; Rev. Vil. 1-3, ete.; ἐργάζεσθαι τὴν θάλ. (see ἐργάζομαι, 2 a.), Rey. xviii. 17; τὸ πέλαγος τῆς Bad. (see πέλαγος, a.), Mt. xviii. 6; joined with γῆ and οὐρανός it forms a periphrasis for the whole world, Acts iv. 24; xiv. 15; Rev. v. 13; x. 6 [L WHbr.]; xiv. 7, (Hage. ii. 7; Ps. exlv. (exlvi.) 6; Joseph. antt. 4, 3, 2; [e. Ap. 2,10,1]); among the visions of the Apocalypse a glassy sea or sea of glass is spoken of; but what the writer symbolized by this is not quite clear: Rev. iv. 6; xv. 2. b. spec. used [even without the art., cf. W. 121 (115); Β. § 124, 8b.] of…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

θάλασσα. BGU II. 4237 (ii/a.D.) (= Selections, p. 90) εὐχαριστῶ | | from Cnidus, Sy// 8152, where a woman devotes to Demeter (cf. 2 Cor 1178) ἔσωσε, P Oxy VII. 1067*9 (iii/A.D.) ἀγόρασόν ᾿ τῷ κυρίῳ Σεράπιδι, ὅτι μου κινδυνεύσαντος εἰς θάλασσαν μοι ὀψαρίδιον ἐκ τῆς θαλάσσης (cf. Jn 2119), and from the inserr. Michel 372" (ii/B.c.) ἐργα[ζ]όμενός τε κατὰ θάλασσαν ἐργασίαν, 7. 52119 (ii/B.c.) κατὰ γῆς καὶ κατὰ θαλάσσας. For references to ἣ ἐρυθρὰ θάλασσα, as in Ac γ35, Heb 117%, cf. P Grenf I. 9% (iii/B.c.) ἐρ]υθρᾶι θαλάσσηι, OG/S 186° (B.C. 62) ὁ συγγενὴς καὶ ἐπιστράτηγος Kal στρατηγὸς τῆς ᾿Ινδικῆς καὶ ᾿Εἰρυθρᾶς θαλάσσης, 16. 190" (B.c. 51) ἐπὶ τῆς ᾿Ινδικῆς καὶ ᾿Εἰρυθρᾶς θαλάσσης : cf. also the intr. to P Ryl 11. 66 (late ii/p.c.). For the adj. θαλάττί--σσ-)ιος, see P Oxy I. 877 (A.D. 342) θαλαττίου ναυκληρίου, ‘a seagoing vessel,” 26. X. 1288® (iv/a.D.) eis διαγραφὴν πλύου θαλασσίας…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

θάλασσα (thalassa) — sea.

θάλασσα [θᾰ],

Attic dialectθᾰλᾰμ-ττα [Refs] (but θάλασσα 22.236 [Refs 4th c.BC+], ἡ: —sea, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: frequently of the Mediterranean sea, ἥδε ἡ θ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ παρ᾽ ἡμῖν θ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ ἐντὸς καὶ κ. ἡ. λεγομένη θ. [Refs 1st c.BC+]; ἡ ἔσω θ. [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ἡ ἔξω θ., of the Ocean, [Refs]; ἡ Ἀτλαντικὴ θ. [Refs]; ἡ μεγάλη θ. [Refs 1st c.AD+]; of a salt lake, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κατὰ θάλασσαν by sea, opposed to πεζῇ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; opposed to κατὰ γῆς, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κατά τε γῆν καὶ κατὰ θ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τῆς θ. ἀνθεκτέα ἐστί one must engage in maritime affairs, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οἱ περὶ τὴν θ. sea-faring men, [Refs 4th c.BC+] a sea of troubles, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ Κρὴς τὴν θ. (i.e. ἀγνοεῖ), of pretended ignorance…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

θάλασσα

thalassa

probably prolonged from 251; the sea (genitive case or

specially):--sea.

see GREEK for 251

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

θάλασσα, ης, ἡ

n.f.

the sea, lake

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

θάλασσα thalassa 91x

the sea, Mt. 23:15, Mk. 9:42; a sea, Acts 7:36; an inland sea, lake, Mt. 8:24

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

θάλασσα the sea, Hom., etc.; when he uses it of a particular sea, he means the Mediterranean, opp. to Ὠκεανός; — Hdt. calls the Mediterranean ἥδε ἡ θάλασσα; so, ἡ παρ᾽ ἡμῖν θάλ. Plat.; κατὰ θάλασσαν by sea, opp. to πεζῇ by land, Hdt.; to κατὰ γῆς, Thuc.:—metaph., κακῶν θ. a sea of troubles, Aesch.

a well of salt water, said to be produced by a stroke of Poseidon's trident, in the Acropolis at Athens, Hdt.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-ASF — Noun · accusative · singular · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

se (yam; thalassa; in Ac 27:5 pelagos): The Mediterranean is called ha-yam ha-gadhol, "the great sea" (Nu 34:6; Jos 1:4; Eze 47:10, etc.); ha-yam ha-'acharon, "the hinder," or "western sea" (De 11:24; 34:2; Joe 2:20; Zec 14:8); yam pelishtim, "the sea of the Philis" (Ex 23:31); the King James Version translates yam yapho' in Ezr 3:7 by "sea of Joppa," perhaps rightly.

Smith's Bible Dictionary

The sea, yam , is used in Scripture to denote-- "The gathering of the waters," "the Ocean." (Genesis 1:2,10; 30:13) etc. Some portion of this, as the Mediterranean Sea, called the "hinder," the "western" and the "utmost" sea, (11:24; 34:2; Joel 2:20) "sea of the Philistines," (Exodus 23:31) "the great sea," (Numbers 36:6,7; Joshua 15:47) "the sea." Genesis49:13; Psal 80:11 Also frequently of the Red Sea. (Exodus 15:4) [RED SEA SEA] Inland lakes termed seas, as the Salt or Dead Sea. [See the special article] Any…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

The Hebrews give the name of sea to any large collection of water, Job 14:11; as to the lakes of Tiberias and Asphaltites, and also to the rivers Nile and Euphrates, Isa 11:15 18:2 21:1 Jer 51:36,42. The principal seas mentioned in Scripture are the following:

1. The GREAT SEA, the Mediterranean, called also the Hinder or Western Sea. Indeed, the Hebrew word for sea, meaning the Mediterranean, is often put for the west. The Great Sea is 2,200 miles long, and in the widest part 1,200 miles in width. In many places it is so deep as to give no soundings. It is little affected by tides, but is often agitated by violent winds. The prevailing direction of the wind in spring is from the southeast and southwest and from the northeast…

Nave's Topical Bible

→ Creation of Ge 1:9,10; Ps 95:5; 148:4,5

→ Lake Galilee calmed by Jesus Mt 8:24-26; Mr 4:37-39

→ Jesus walked upon Lake Galilee Mt 14:25-31

→ The Dead, to be given up by the, at the resurrection Re 20:13

→ SYMBOLICAL

In Daniel' s vision Da 7:2,3

In John' s apocalyptic vision Re 4:6; 8:8,9; 10:2,5,6,8; 13:1; 15:2; 16:3; 21:1

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
99%sea
sea99% · 89×other renderings1% · 1×

90 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial69%subject12%object10%predicate8%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 91 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
εἰςἐπίἐν
ἐρυθρόςred
ἐνArticle the
παρά
οἰκίαa house, househoβυρσεύςa tanner
ὡςas, like as, how, wh
θρόνοςa throne, seatὁράωI see, look upon
ὁδόςa way, road, journey
ΝεφθαλίμProp
θάλασσαsea,91×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
πᾶςall, the whole, γίνομαιI come into beinArticle the
Article the
ΓαλιλαίαGalileeΤιβεριάςTiberiasδίκηjustice, judicia
εἰμίI am, exist
γάρforκαίand, even, also,
περιπατέωI walk, conduct my l
ταράσσωI agitate, stir δοκέωI think, seem, a
εἰς
Article theΚαφαρναούμProp

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceθάλασσα · 91× in the New Testament
Revelation Mark Matthew Acts John Luke 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians James Jude Romans
Across the New Testament12 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 224 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Posterity of Cain 84c. AD 40

οὐ γὰρ ἀναπτῆναι, φησίν, εἰς οὐρανὸν οὐδὲ πέραν θαλάσσης ἀφικέσθαι δεῖ κατὰ ζήτησιν τοῦ καλοῦ·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.31c. AD 75–95

τῇ δὲ τρίτῃ ἵστησι τὴν γῆν ἀναχέας περὶ αὐτὴν τὴν θάλασσαν·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 4.5c. AD 100

ὁμοίως περὶ τοῦ αὐτοῦ λέγει Δανιήλ: Καὶ εἶδον τὸ τέταρτον θηρίον τὸ πονηρὸν καὶ ἰσχυρὸν καὶ χαλεπώτερον παρὰ πάντα τὰ θηρία τῆς θαλάσσης, καὶ ὡς ἐξ αὐτοῦ ἀνέτειλεν δέκα κέρατα, καὶ ἐξ αὐτῶν μικρὸν κέρας παραφυάδιον, καὶ ὡς ἐταπείνωσεν ὑφ̓ ἓν τρία…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. AD 2nd c. BC 4th c. AD
O.Berenike 2 124 RoBerenikeAD 50–AD 75

σηδυω … … … αμβα. … … ηρου … ε … ω θαλασσα … α … … … ἠλλαχέναι σοι

749339Myos HormosAD 93

ἐν Μυὸς Ὅρμωι τῶι πρὸς τῇ ἐρυθρᾷ θαλάσσῃ ἔτους δωδεκάτου Αὐτοκράτορος Καίσαρος Δομιτιανοῦ Σεβαστοῦ Γερμανικοῦ Φαμενὼθ ἐνάτῃ καὶ εἰκάδι Ἀμμώνιος Εὐδαίμονος Πέρσης

BGU 2 423Misenum? (Italien)AD 101–AD 200

θυγατρὸς αὐτῆς καὶ τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ μου. εὐχαριστῶ τῷ κυρίῳ Σεράπιδι ὅτι μου κινδυνεύσαντος εἰς θάλασσαν ἔσωσε εὐθέως. ὅτε εἰσῆλθον εἰς Μησήνους, ἔλαβα βιάτικον παρὰ Καίσαρος χρυσοῦς τρεῖς καὶ καλῶς

And the anchors having cut away they were leaving [them] in the sea, at the same time having loosened the ropes of the rudders And having hoisted the foresail to the blowing [wind] they were making for the shore.
ἅμαhama at the same time G260 Adverb
10× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Together or at the same time, like in Acts 24:26 where people act together. It can also mean close association, like being together with someone in 1 Thessalonians 4:17.
Tyndale gloss
together
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἅμα (*hama*) is primarily an adverb meaning 'at the same time' or 'at once.' It can also function as a preposition meaning 'together with,' typically followed by a dative case. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, such as Acts and Matthew, often indicating simultaneous actions or events.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἅμα

adv.,

at once (Lat. simul): Ac 24:26 27:40, Ro 3:12 (one and all = יַחַד, Ps 14:3), Col 4:3, I Ti 5:13, Phm 22; seq. σύν, I Th 4:17 5:10; as prep. c. dat., together with: Mt 13:29 (v. MM, VGT, s.v.); also, c. adv., ἅ. πρωΐ (cl., ἅ. ἕω, etc.), early in the morning: Mt 20:1.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἅμα [Skr. sa, sama; Eng. same; Lat. simul; Germ. sammt, ete.; Curtius § 449; Vanitek p. 972. Fr. Hom. down]; 1. adv., at the same time, at once, together: Acts xxiv. 26; xxvii. 40; Col. iv. 8; 1 Tim. v. 13; Philem. 22; all to a man, every one, Ro. 111, 12. 2. prep. [W. 470 (439)], together with, with dat. : Mt. xiii. 29. ἅμα πρωΐ early in the morning: Mt. xx. 1, (in Grk. writ. ἅμα τῷ ἡλίῳ, ἅμα τῇ ἡμέρᾳ). In 1 Th. iv. 17 and y. 10, where ἅμα is foll. by σύν, ἅμα is an adv. (at the same time) and must be joined to the verb.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἅμα. The adverbial use seen in Mt 20! may be illustrated by P Flor I. 36° (c. iv/a.D., init.) μνηστευσαμένου pov... τὴν ... [θ]υγατέρα ... [ἅ]μα ex νηπίας ἡλικίας, P Oxy VII. 1025}6 (late iii/A.D.) τῶν θεωριῶν ἅμ᾽ αὔ[ρ]ιον ἥτις ἐστὶν τ ἀγομ[έν]ων. For ἅμα = ‘at the same time,” see P Giss I. 138 (ii/A.D.) πέμψεις ἅμα τὰς Y ἐπιστολάς, P Oxy IV. 798 (probably B.C. 183) ds δ᾽ ἂν παραγένωνται οἱ σιτολόγοι ἐπὶ τὴν παράληψιν τῶν σιτικῶν ἀπομετρήσομεν ἅμα καὶ ταῦτα, αἰ. With ἅμα ς. dat. ‘together with,” cf. P Oxy IV. 658}8 (A.D. 250) τῶν ἱερῶν ἐγευσάμην ἅμα τῷ υἱῷ pov, so with a dat. Rein 26!4 (8.6. 104) ἅμα τῆι συγγραφῆι ταύτηι ἀναφερομένηι, P Oxy VI. 975 (i/A-D-) a loan to be repaid ἅμα τῇ ᾿μῇ τρύ[γ]ῃ», P Petr 1. 24 (3) ((. B.C. 249) ἅμα τῆι λοιπῆι ἀγορᾶι ἧι εἰλήφασι ἐγ βασιλικοῦ, P Flor I. 61° (A.D. 210) ἐχειροτονήθην ἅμ᾽ ἄλλοις, 16. 2115 (A.D. 239) ἅμα τοῖς τῆς κώμης δημοσίοις (neuter)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἅμα (hama) — together.

ἅμᾰ [ᾰμ],

Doric dialect ἁμᾶ, which see: (see. entry near the end):

__A adverb at once, at the same time, mostly of Time, frequently added to τε.. καί, ἅμ᾽ οἰμωγή τε καὶ εὐχωλή[Refs 8th c.BC+]

__A.2 ἅ. μέν.. ἅ. δέ.., partly.. partly.., [Refs 5th c.BC+]

__A.3 in Prose ἅ. δέ.. καί.., ἅ. τε.. καί.., ἅ... καί.. may often be translated by no sooner.. than.., ἅ. δὲ ταῦτα ἔλεγε καὶ ἀπεδείκνυε[Refs 5th c.BC+]

__A.3.b ἅ. μῦθος ἔην, τετέλεστο δὲ ἔργον 'no sooner said than done', [Refs 8th c.BC+]

__A.3.c with participle and finite Verb in same sense, βρίζων ἅ... ἐξήμελξας εὐτραφὲς γάλα[Refs 4th c.BC+]; ἅ. εἰπὼν ἀνέστη as soon as he had done speaking, he stood up, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τῆς ἀγγελίας ἅ. ῥηθείσης ἐπεβοήθουν as soon as news was…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἅμα

hama

a primary particle; properly, at the "same" time, but freely used as a

preposition or adverb denoting close association:--also, and,

together, with(-al).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἅμα

Adv

at the same time, along with

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἅμα hama 10x

also functions as an improper preposition with the genitive (2x), with, together with; at the same time

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἅμα Cf. ὁμοῦ, Lat. simul. at once, at the same time, Hom., etc.

prep. c. dat. at the same time with, together with, ἅμ᾽ ἠοῖ at dawn, Il.; ἅμα ἕῳ, ἅμα ἕῳ γιγνομένῃ Thuc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adv — Adverb
adverb — it qualifies the verb, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

ADV ADVerb or adverb and particle combined

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

tim: The basis of the Hebrew measurement of time was the day and the lunar month, as with the Semites generally. The division of the day into hours was late, probably not common until after the exile, although the sun-dial of Ahaz (2Ki 20:9; Isa 38:8) would scent to indicate some division of the day into periods of some sort, as we know the night was divided, The word used for "hour" is Aramaic she`a' (sha`ta'), and does not occur in the Old Testament until the Book of Daniel (4:33; 5:5), and even there it stands for an indefinite period for which "time" would answer as well.

1. The Day:

The term "day" (yom) was in use from the earliest times, as is indicated in the story of the Creation (Ge 1). It there doubtless denotes an indefinite period, but is marked off by "evening and…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

Besides the ordinary uses of this word, the Bible sometimes employs it to denote a year, as in Da 4:16; or a prophetic year, consisting of three hundred and sixty natural year, a day being taken for a year. Thus in Da 7:25 12:7, the phrase "a time, times, and the dividing of a time" is supposed to mean three and a half prophetic years, or 1,260 natural years. This period is elsewhere paralleled by the expression, "forty-two months," each month including thirty years, Re 11:2-3 12:6,14 13:5.

Nave's Topical Bible

→ Beginning of Ge 1:1,14

→ Epochs of

Before the flood Jos 24:2

→ The exodus Ex 19:1; 40:17; 1Ki 6:1

→ Daniel' s reckoning of time, and times, and half times Da 7:25; 12:7

→ Indicated by a sun-dial 2Ki 20:9-11; Isa 38:8

→ Division of, into watches Ex 14:24; 1Sa 11:11; Mt 14:25; Mr 6:48

Torrey's New Topical Textbook

- The duration of the world

Job 22:16; Re 10:6

- The measure of the continuance of anything

Jud 18:31

- An appointed season

Ne 2:6; Ec 3:1,17

- COMPUTED BY

. Years

Ge 15:13; 2Sa 21:1; Da 9:2

. Months

Nu 10:10; 1Ch 27:1; Job 3:6

. Weeks

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
50%at the same time
at the same time50% · 5×together40% · 4×in10% · 1×

10 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 10 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ἐκριζόωI root out, root up
ζιζάνιονspurious wheat,
ἐξέρχομαιI go out, come out
ὅστις
θάλασσαthe sea, lake
Article the
ἐκκλίνωI fall away from, tu
πᾶςall, the whole,
προσεύχομαιI pray, pray for
ἅμαat the same time10×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
ἐλπίζωI hope, hope forπερί
σύν
αὐτός
δέbut, on the other ha
καίand, even, also,
αὐτός
Article the
πρωΐearly in the morning
μισθόωI hire out, hire

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἅμα · 10× in the New Testament
1 Thessalonians Acts Matthew 1 Timothy Colossians Philemon Romans
Across the New Testament7 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 67 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Ignatius of Antioch The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 13c. AD 40

Ἓξ δὲ ἡμέραις δημιουργηθῆναί φησι τὸν κόσμον, οὐκ ἐπειδὴ προσεδεῖτο χρόνων μήκους ὁ ποιῶν — ἅμα γὰρ πάντα δρᾶν εἰκὸς θεόν, οὐ προστάττοντα μόνον ἀλλὰ καὶ διανοούμενον —, ἀλλ’ ἐπειδὴ τοῖς γινομένοις ἔδει τάξεως.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.92c. AD 75–95

ἐπανελθούσης δὲ πεπηλωμένης ἅμα καὶ θαλλὸν ἐλαίας κομιζούσης, μαθὼν τὴν γῆν ἀπηλλαγμένην τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ μείνας ἄλλας ἑπτὰ ἡμέρας τά τε ζῷα τῆς λάρνακος ἐξαφίησιν αὐτός τε μετὰ τῆς γενεᾶς προελθὼν καὶ θύσας τῷ θεῷ συνευωχεῖτο τοῖς οἰκείοις.

Ignatius of AntiochThe Letters of Ignatius 1.2.1c. AD 110

Περὶ δὲ τοῦ συνδούλου μου Βούρρου, τοῦ κατὰ θεὸν διακόνου ὑμῶν ἐν πᾶσιν εὐλογημένου, εὔχομαι παραμεῖναι αὐτὸν εἰς τιμὴν ὑμῶν καὶ τοῦ ἐπισκόπου: καὶ Κρόκος δέ, ὁ θεοῦ ἄξιος καὶ ὑμῶν, ὅν ἐξεμπλάριον τῆς ἀφ̓ ὑμῶν ἀγάπης ἀπέλαβον, κατὰ πάντα με…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 2nd c. AD 6th c. AD 3rd c. BC
P.Cair. Zen. 3 59433Philadelphia (Arsinoites)276 BC–227 BC

μου κινηθῆναι διὰ τὸ πρός τε τῶι θερισμῶι εἶναι καὶ τῆι συναγωγῆι τοῦ σίτου· ἅμα δὲ καὶ οἱ ἄγριοι βόες ἡμᾶς κεκωλύκασιν· Θεοδώραν δὲ ἀπέσταλκά σοι κομίζουσαν τὸν χιτῶνα

P.Cair. Zen. 3 59500Hiera Nesos (Arsinoites)276 BC–227 BC

κατίσχειν μετʼ ἐμαυτοῦ. προσπαραλήψομαι δὲ καὶ Παῆσιν καὶ τοὺς υἱοὺς αὐτοῦ· δοκιμάζω γὰρ αὐτούς, ἅμα δὲ καὶ τῆς γῆς τῆς ἐνταῦθα οὐκ ἄπειροί εἰσιν. ὥρα δέ ἐστιν ἐργάζεσθαι ἀπὸ

P.Cair. Zen. 3 59496Krokodilopolis (Arsinoites)249 BC–242 BC

ἐπιστολὴν ἵνα ἀφεθῶ· ὡσαύτως δὲ καὶ Πύθωνι καὶ Ἀντιπάτρωι γράψον αὐτοῖς ἵνα μνησθῶσιν αὐτῶι ἅμα τῆι ἐπιστολῆι τῆι παρὰ σοῦ ἀποδιδομένηι αὐτῶι. ἠξίωσα δὲ καὶ Νικαίαν ἀποδημῆσαι πρὸς σέ,

And the anchors having cut away they were leaving [them] in the sea, at the same time having loosened the ropes of the rudders And having hoisted the foresail to the blowing [wind] they were making for the shore.
ἀνέντεςaniēmi having loosened G447 Verb · second aorist · active · participle · nominative · plural · masculine
4× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To loosen or leave something means to let it go or stop supporting it, as seen in Hebrews 13:5 and Acts 16:26. This can also mean to give up or desist from something. It is often translated as forbear, leave, or loose.
Amplified meaning
untied, set free
Tyndale gloss
to loosen/leave
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀνίημι (i.e., *aniēmi*) is built from the prefix ἀν- and the root ἵημι, meaning to send or let go. It covers a range of meanings including to loosen, release, and give up. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts such as Acts 16:26, Acts 27:40, and Hebrews 13:5, where it conveys ideas of loosening bonds or leaving without support.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀν-ίημι

(ἀνά, ἵημι),

[in LXX for רפה, נשׂא, etc.;]

to send up, produce, to send back.

to let go, leave without support: He 13:5 (cf. De 31:6; Hom., Il., ii, 71).

to relax, loosen (v. Field, Notes, 124 f.): Ac 16:26 27:40; hence, metaph., to give up, desist from: Eph 6:9.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀν-ίημι, [ptep. plur. ἀνιέντες]: 2 aor. subj. ava, ptep. plur. ἀνέντες ; 1 aor. pass. dveOnv; to send back; to relax; contextually, to loosen: ri, Acts xvi. 26, (rods δεσμούς, Plut. Alex. M. 73); xxvii. 40. trop. τὴν ἀπειλήν, to give up, omit, calm [?], Eph. vi. 9; (τὴν ἔχθραν, Thue. 3, 10; τὴν ὀργήν, Plut. Alex. M.70). to leave, not to uphold, to let sink: Heb. xiii. 5, (Deut. xxxi. 6).

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀνίημι (aniēmi) — to loosen/leave.

ἀνίημι, ης

(ἀνιεῖς, as if from ἀνιέω, uncertain in [Refs 8th c.BC+], ησι: imperfect ἀνίην, [Refs 8th c.BC+] and 3rd.pers.singular εις, ει, Ionic dialect 3rd.pers.singular ἀνίη[Refs 8th c.BC+]; 1st pers.singular ἀνίειν[Refs 2nd c.AD+]future ἀνήσω: perfect ἀνεῖκα: aorist 1 ἀνῆκ; Ionic dialect ἀνέηκα.:—the Homeric forms ἀνέσει[Refs 8th c.BC+], aorist optative ἀνέσαιμι[Refs], participle ἀνέσαντες[Refs 8th c.BC+]: aorist 2, 3rd.pers.plural ἀνεῖσαν[Refs 5th c.BC+], subjunctive ἀνῇς[Refs 4th c.BC+], Epic dialect 3rd.pers.singular subjunctive ἀνήη[Refs 8th c.BC+]infinitive ἀνεῖναι, participle ἀνείς:—passive, ἀνίεμαι: perfect ἀνεῖμαι[Refs 5th c.BC+], 3rd.pers.plural perfect ἀνέωνται[Refs 5th c.BC+]infinitive ἀνἑῶσθαι (sic) [Refs]: aorist participle ἀνεθείς[Refs 5th c.BC+]: future ἀνεθήσομαι[Refs 5th c.BC+] Attic dialect: but even [Refs 8th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀνίημι

aniemi

from 303 and hiemi (to send); to let up, i.e. (literally) slacken or

(figuratively) desert, desist from:--forbear, leave, loose.

see GREEK for 303

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀνίημι

v.

I let go, loosen, release, give up, neglect

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀνίημι aniēmi 4x

(1) to loose, slacken, Acts 27:40; to unbind, unfasten, Acts 16:26; (2) to omit, dispense with, Eph. 6:9; (3) to leave or neglect, Heb. 13:5*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀνίημι For quantities, ἀνι epic, ἀνι_- attic; but Hom. has ἀνι_ει, ἀνι_έμενος. The forms ἀνιεῖς, -εῖ are formed as if they were from ἀνιέω. The Homeric forms in ἀνεσ- are created as if from ἀν-έζω. The Ionic form ἀνέωνται is formed as if from ἀν-εόω. to send up or forth, Hom., etc.; of the earth, to make spring up, Hhymn.; of females, to produce, Soph.:— Pass. to be sent up, produced, Aesch., etc.; to send up from the grave or nether world, id. Aesch., etc.

to send back, put back, open, Hom., Eur.

to let go, leave, Hom., etc.; c. gen. rei, δεσμῶν ἀνίει loosed them from bonds, Od.: to let go unpunished, Xen.

ἀν. τινί to let loose at one, ἀν. κύνας, Lat. canes immittere, Xen.; hence, ἄφρονα τοῦτον ἀνέντες Il.: c. inf. to set on or urge to do a thing, Hom.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-2AAP-NPM — Verb · second aorist · active · participle · nominative · plural · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-2AAP-NPM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
25%loosed
loosed25% · 1×having loosened25% · 1×giving up25% · 1×shall i leave25% · 1×

4 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 4 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
δεσμόςa bond, chain
Article the
ἅμαat the same time, al
θάλασσαthe sea, lake
αὐτός
πρός
σύ
μήNeg
ἀνίημιhaving loosened
what comes after →
Article the
ζευκτηρίαa band, fasteninἀπειλήa threatening, t
οὐδέNeg
οὐNeg

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀνίημι · 4× in the New Testament
Acts Ephesians Hebrews
Across the New Testament3 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 22 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 41c. AD 40

τίς γὰρ οὐκ οἶδεν ὅτι πρῶτον μέν ἐστι σπορὰ καὶ φυτεία, δεύτερον δὲ τῶν σπαρέντων καὶ φυτευθέντων αὔξησις, ἡ μὲν εἰς τὸ κάτω ῥίζας ἀποτείνουσα οἱονεὶ θεμελίους, ἡ δ’ εἰς τὸ ἄνω πρὸς ὕψος αἰρομένων καὶ στελεχουμένων;

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 3.140c. AD 75–95

κοιλαίνεται δὲ καθʼ ἕκαστον πλευρὸν κοιλαίνουσά πως κατὰ παλαιστὴν τὸ ἔδαφος ἕλικος περιθεούσης τό τε ἄνω καὶ τὸ κάτω μέρος τοῦ σώματος, καθʼ ἕκαστον δὲ τῶν ποδῶν καὶ ταύτῃ ἐλήλατο κρίκος οὐκ ἄπωθεν τοῦ ἐπιθέματος, διʼ ὧν ᾔεσαν στελεοὶ χρύσεοι ξύλου…

Clement of RomeSecond Clement 19.4c. AD 96

ἐὰν ἐπὶ τοῖς νῦν χρόνοις ταλαιπωρῇ: μακάριος αὐτὸν ἀναμένει χρόνος: ἐκεῖνος ἄνω μετὰ τῶν πατέρων ἀναβιώσας εὐφρανθήσεται εἰς τὸν ἀλύπητον αἰῶνα.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. AD 2nd c. BC 4th c. AD
P.Lond. 3 p. 18 no. 678Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC–99 BC

τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν μηνὸς Χοιὰκ … ἐν Κροκοδίλων πόλει ἐπὶ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου τῆς ἄνω τοπαρχίας τοῦ Παθυρίτου. ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Σχώτου ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν νδ ἐλάσσων

BGU 3 999Pathyris100 BC

Πατσεοῦς Πέρσης τῆς ἐπιγονῆς ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος μελίχρως τετανὸς μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν οὐλὴ ὀδόντι ἄνω ἀπὸ τῆς ὑπαρχούσης αὐτῷ οἰκίας ᾠκοδομημένης καὶ ἐστεγασμένης τῆς οὔσης ἐν τῷ ἀπὸ νότου

P.Adl. 20Poinkoris (Diopolites)99 BC

ἐκ τοῦ Παθυρίτου τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν τῶι πατρὶ τοῦ Ὥρου γῆν ἀρουρῶν … ἐν τῶι ἄνω πεδίωι Κροκοδίλων πόλεως ἀπὸ σφραγῖδος μιᾶς ἀναγραφομένης εἰς Ψενμ … τῶν πενταρούρων, νότου γῆ

And the anchors having cut away they were leaving [them] in the sea, at the same time having loosened the ropes of the rudders And having hoisted the foresail to the blowing [wind] they were making for the shore.
τὰςho the G3588 Article · accusative · plural · feminine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-APF — Article · accusative · plural · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-APF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Feminine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

And the anchors having cut away they were leaving [them] in the sea, at the same time having loosened the ropes of the rudders And having hoisted the foresail to the blowing [wind] they were making for the shore.
ζευκτηρίαςzeuktēria ropes G2202 Noun · accusative · plural · feminine
1× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A rope or fastening, like a tiller-rope on a ship, is what this word describes, used in Acts 27:40 to help navigate the vessel.
Amplified meaning
cords, fastenings
Tyndale gloss
rope
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ζευκτηρία (i.e., *zeukteria*) refers to a fastening or band, specifically the crossbar of a double rudder. It is derived from the adjective ζευκτήριος meaning 'fit for joining.' This term appears only once in the New Testament, in Acts 27:40, and is not commonly found in other Greek literature.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

*† ζευκτήριος, -α -ον

(< ζεύγνυμι),

fit for joining. As subst.,

ζευκτήριον, τό = ζυγόν, a yoke;

ζευκτηρία, -ας, ἡ = ζεύγλη, the crossbar of a double rudder: Ac 27:40 (found nowhere else).†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ζευκτηρία, -as, ἡ, (fr. the adj. ζευκτήριος, fit for joining or binding together), a band, fastening: Acts xxvii. 40. Found nowhere else.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ζευκτηρία (zeuktēria) — rope.

Related to: ζεύγλ-η, ἡ,

loop attached to the yoke (ζυγόν), through which the beasts' heads were put, χαίτη ζεύγλης ἐξεριποῦσα παρὰ ζυγόν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὑποδύντες ὑπὸ τὴν ζ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὑπάγειν τοὺς ἵππους τῇ ζ. [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

2. ={ζεῦγος}[Refs 3rd c.BC+] —Not found in good _Attic dialect_ Prose.

II. cross-bar of the double rudder, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ζευκτηρία

zeukteria

feminine of a derivative (at the second stage) from the same as 2218;

a fastening (tiller-rope):--band.

see GREEK for 2218

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ζευκτηρία, ας, ἡ

n.f.

a band, fastening

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ζευκτηρία zeuktēria 1x

a fastening, band, Acts 27:40*

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-APF — Noun · accusative · plural · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-APF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Feminine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
100%ropes
ropes100% · 1×

1 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

Concordanceζευκτηρία · 1× in the New Testament
Acts
Across the New Testament1 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD
O.Krok. 1 86KrokodiloAD 98–AD 138

καμήλων εἰς Φοινικῶνα καὶ παραλήμψῃ κιβάρια· μὴ οὖν ἄλλως ποιήσῃς· ἐγὼ γὰρ ἔχω ἔτι ζευκτηρίας παραλαβεῖν· κόμισαι παρὰ τοῦ καμηλίτου ζευκτηρίας τέσσαρας … … … ητ

O.Claud. 4 839Mons ClaudianusAD 136–AD 137

ιϛ μυ ιϛ διὰ Καλοκαίρου ἀκόνη α στομωτηρίῳ με δ λατομίᾳ ἄνθρακος με γ ζευκτηρία λιθοπο α κ εἰς στομωτήριον μυ ιϛ δερματικοὶ κόφινοι ζ λατομίᾳ ἄνθρακος ν στωμητηρίῳ

O.Claud. 4 840Mons ClaudianusAD 136–AD 137

μυ ιϛ λατομίᾳ με ϛ διὰ Καλοκαίρου ἀκόνη στομωτηρίῳ με α ἀσκοὶ ὑδρηγοὶ α ζευκτηρία λιθοπο α κ εἰς στομωτήριον στρογγυλων μυ ιϛ κ κόφινοι βύρσινοι ζ λατομίᾳ με

And the anchors having cut away they were leaving [them] in the sea, at the same time having loosened the ropes of the rudders And having hoisted the foresail to the blowing [wind] they were making for the shore.
τῶνho of the G3588 Article · genitive · plural · neuter
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-GPN — Article · genitive · plural · neuter
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-GPN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Plural Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

ov:

(1) In Anglo-Saxon, had the meaning "from," "away from" (as the strengthened form "off" has still), and was not used for genitive or possessive relations, these being expressed by special case-forms. In the Norman period, however, "of" was taken to represent the French de (a use well developed by the time of Chaucer), and in the Elizabethan period both senses of "of" were in common use. But after about 1600 the later force of the word became predominant, and in the earlier sense (which is now practically obsolete) it was replaced by other prepositions. In consequence the King James Version (and in some cases the Revised Version (British and American)) contains many uses of "of" that are no longer familiar--most of them, to be sure, causing no difficulty, but there still being a few responsible for real obscurities.

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

OF, preposition ov. [Gr.]

1. From or out of; proceeding from, as the cause, source, means, author or agent bestowing.

I have received of the Lord that which also I delivered to you. 1 Corinthians 11:1.

For it was of the Lord to harden their hearts. Joshua 11:1.

It is of the Lord's mercies that we are not consumed.

Lamentations 3:1.

The whole disposing thereof is of the Lord. Proverbs 16:1.

Go, inquire of the Lord for me. 2 Chronicles 34:2.

That holy thing that shall be born of thee. Luke 1:1.

Hence of is the sign of the genitive case, the case that denotes production; as the son of man, the son proceeding from man, produced from man. This is the primary sense, although we now say, produced by man. 'Part of these were slain; ' that is, a number separate, for part denotes a division; the sense then is, a number from or out of the whole were slain. So also, 'some of these were slain; ' that is…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
of the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

And the anchors having cut away they were leaving [them] in the sea, at the same time having loosened the ropes of the rudders And having hoisted the foresail to the blowing [wind] they were making for the shore.
πηδαλίωνpēdalion rudders G4079 Noun · genitive · plural · neuter
2× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A rudder is a device that steers a ship, used in James 3:4 and Acts 27:40 to describe how a small part can control a large thing.
Amplified meaning
steering devices, navigational tools
Tyndale gloss
rudder
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word πηδάλιον (pedalion) means 'rudder' and is derived from πηδός, referring to the blade of an oar. It appears in the New Testament in James 3:4 and Acts 27:40, highlighting its use in steering ships. The term also has metaphorical applications, such as referring to reins in horse riding.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

* πηδάλιον, -ου, τό

(< πηδός, the blade of an oar),

a rudder: Ja 3:4; pl., Ac 27:40.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πηδάλιον, -ου, τό, (fr. πηδόν the blade of an oar, an TiKpaives oar), fr. Hom. down, aship’s rudder: Acts xxvii. 40 [on the plur. see Smith, Voy. and Shipwreck of St. Paul, 4th ed., p. 183 sqq.; B.D.s.v. Ship (2); ef. Graser, Das Seewesen des Alterthums, in the Philologus for 1865, Ρ. 266 sq.]; Jas. iii. 4.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

πηδάλιον, “‘rudder’’: P Oxy XIV. 1650" (freight account—i/1i A.D.) πηδαλίου (Sp.) vd (τετρώβολον), ‘rudder 14 dr. 4 ob.,” 76. XII. 14491 (return of temple property—a.D. 213-17) πηδάλ(ιον) τῆς [Newr(épas) ἢ, ‘Sa rudder representing Neotera” (Edd.), and for the plur., as in Ac 27°, P Lond 1164(2)8 (A.D. 212) (=ITI. p. 164) σὺν... πηδαλίοις δυσί, “*with two rudders ’’ (said of a boat).

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πηδάλιον (pēdalion) — rudder.

πηδάλι-ον [ᾰ], τό,

(πηδόν) steering-paddle, rudder, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; π. δὲ ἓν ποιεῦνται (i.e. Αἰγύπτιοι) καὶ τοῦτο διὰ τῆς τρόπιος διαβύνεται [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Greek ships had a pair, hence in plural, of a single ship, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πηδάλια ζεύγλαισι (cross-bars) παρακαθίετο [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀνέντες τὰς ζευκτηρίας τῶν π. [NT]; πηδάλια εἶχε τέτταρα τριακονταπήχη, of the τεσσαρακοντήρης of Ptolemy IV, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] to retire from a seafaring life, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. metaphorically, ἱππικὰ π., of reins, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

πηδάλιον

pedalion

neuter of a (presumed) derivative of pedon (the blade of an oar; from

the same as 3976); a "pedal", i.e. helm:--rudder.

see GREEK for 3976

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πηδάλιον, ου, τό

n.n.

the rudder of a ship

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πηδάλιον pēdalion 2x

a rudder, Acts 27:40; Jas. 3:4*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

πηδάλιον πηδάλιον, ου, τό, πηδός a rudder or an oar used for steering, Od.; after Homer, a Greek ship commonly had two πηδάλια joined by cross-bars (ζεῦγλαι) and worked by a handle or tiller (οἴαξ).

metaph., ἱππικὰ π. of reins, Aesch.; πηδαλίῳ δικαίῳ νωμᾶν στρατόν Pind.; τὰ π. τῆς διανοίας Plat.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GPN — Noun · genitive · plural · neuter
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GPN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Plural Gender: Neuter

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
50%rudders
rudders50% · 1×rudder50% · 1×

2 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ζευκτηρίαa band, fastenin
ἐλάχιστοςleast, smallest, ver
ὑπό
πηδάλιονrudders
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
ἐπαίρωI raise, lift up
ὅπουwhere, whither
Article the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπηδάλιον · 2× in the New Testament
Acts James
Across the New Testament2 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Posterity of Cain 142c. AD 40

τὸ γὰρ ἄγκυραν ἢ πλάτην ἢ πηδάλιον γεωπόνῳ ἢ ἄροτρα καὶ σκαπάνην κυβερνήτῃ ἢ λύραν μὲν ἰατρῷ, μουσικῷ δὲ τὰ κατὰ τὴν χειρουργίαν δωρεῖσθαι ὄργανα καταγέλαστον, εἰ μὴ καὶ διψῶσι μὲν πολυτελῆ σιτία, πεινῶσι δὲ πολὺν ἄκρατον ἐπιφέρειν δεῖ πρὸς…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. BC 1st c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Oxy. 49 3484OxyrhynchosAD 27–AD 33

τὸν ἀνάπλουν τοῦ πυροῦ … πρὸς τὸν κατάπλουν τοῦ οἴνου ετι … ου καὶ πηδαλίου καὶ τοῦ ἐπὶ τῶν θη… ἀπαιτηθησομένου, ἔτι δὲ καὶ πάντων τῶν τοῦ ἀναπλόου καὶ

P.Oxy. 14 1650OxyrhynchosAD 76–AD 125

δραχμαὶ δ, τραπεζίτῃ δραχμὴ α, χειριστικοῦ δραχμαὶ ε, ἀλλαγῆς δραχμὴ α, ἑρμηνεῖ δραχμαὶ β, πηδαλίου δραχμαὶ ιδ τετρώβολον, φύλακι ἀπὸ γῆς καὶ κυδάρῳ τετρώβολον, γραμματεῦσι δραχμαὶ δ, Ἀρτεμεῖτι δραχμὴ

P.Oxy. 14 1650 aOxyrhynchosAD 76–AD 125

, λόγος Μέμφεως· κυάμου δραχμαὶ ριθ, νέου δραχμαὶ ε πεντώβολον, πηδαλίου δραχμαὶ ιδ πεντώβολον, τραπεζίτῃ δραχμὴ α, γένους δραχμαὶ η, ἐραυνητικοῦ δραχμαι … , ταμείου

And the anchors having cut away they were leaving [them] in the sea, at the same time having loosened the ropes of the rudders And having hoisted the foresail to the blowing [wind] they were making for the shore.
καὶkai And G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίAnd8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

And the anchors having cut away they were leaving [them] in the sea, at the same time having loosened the ropes of the rudders And having hoisted the foresail to the blowing [wind] they were making for the shore.
ἐπάραντεςepairō having hoisted G1869 Verb · aorist · active · participle · nominative · plural · masculine
19× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To lift up means to raise something or someone, like in Luke 24:50 where Jesus lifts up his hands to bless his disciples. It can also mean to be proud or arrogant, as in 2 Corinthians 10:5.
Amplified meaning
lifted up, raised
Tyndale gloss
to lift up
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἐπαίρω (i.e., *epairō*) means to lift up or raise, both literally and figuratively. It appears in various contexts, such as lifting hands in prayer (1 Tim 2:8) or being exalted with pride (2 Cor 10:5). The word is built from the prefix ἐπ- and the root αἴρω, and it is used in both the New Testament and classical literature.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐπ-αίρω

[in LXX for נָשָׂא, רוּם, etc. ;]

to lift up, raise: τ. ἀρτέμονα, Ac 27:40; χεῖρας, Lk 24:50, I Ti 2:8; κεφαλάς, Lk 21:28; ὀφθαλμούς, Mt 17:8, Lk 6:20 16:23 18:13, Jo 4:35 6:5 17:1; φωνήν, Lk 11:27, Ac 2:14 14:11 22:22; τ. πτέρναν (fig.), Jo 13:18. Pass., Ac 1:9; metaph., to be lifted up with pride: II Co 10:5

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐπ-αίρω; 1 aor. ἐπῆρα, ptcp. ἐπάρας, impv. 2 pers. plur. ἐπάρατε, inf. ἐπᾶραι ; pf. ἐπῆρκα (Jn. xiii. 18 Tdf.); [Pass. and Mid., pres. éraipopat]; 1 aor. pass. ἐπήρθην ; (on the om. of iota subser. see αἴρω init.) ; fr. Hdt. down; Sept. chiefly for 871, also for ὉΠ; ἰο lift up, raise up, raise onhigh: τὸν ἀρτέμονα, to hoist up, Acts xxvii. 40 (τὰ ἱστία. Plut. mor. p. 870 [de Herod. malign. ὃ 39]); ras χεῖρας, in offering prayer, 1 Tim. ii. 8 (Neh. viii. 6; Ps. exxxiii. (exxxiv.) 2); in blessing, Lk. xxiv. 50 [ef. W. § 65, 4¢.] (Lev. ix. 22 [yet here ἐξάρας]; Sir. 1. 20); τὰς κεφαλάς, of the timid and sorrowful recovering spirit, Lk. xxi. 28 (so αὐχένα, Philo de prof. § 20); τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς, to look up, Mt. xvii. 8; Lk. xvi. 23; Jn. iv. 35; vi. 5; εἴς twa, Lk. vi. 20; εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν, Lk. xviii. 13; Jn. xvii. 1; τὴν φωνήν, Lk. xi. 27; Acts ii. 14; xiv. 11; xxii. 22, (Dem. 449, 13; Sept.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐπαίρω. P Petr III. 46(3)1} εἰς τοὺς ἐπαρθέντας τοίχους (corrected from τὸν ἐπαρθέντα), ‘walls built to a greater height” (Edd.). P Oxy X. 1272! (A.D. 144) Kal τὴν τοῦ πεσσοῦ θύραν ἐπηρ[μ]ένην ‘‘and that the door of the terrace had been lifted” (Edd.). Sy/Z 73774 (ii/a.D.) ‘‘ whoever wishes the resolutions just read to be passed and inscribed on a pillar—dparw τὴν χεῖρα. πάντες ἐπῆραν," where the compound following the simplex has the stronger perfective force (Pro/eg. p. 113). As illustrating the Jewish (Ps 285) and Christian (1 Tim 28) as well as, Pagan (Virg. dev. i. 93) practice of “lifting up’”’ hands in prayer, reference may be made to the two uplifted hands shown on the stele inscribed with the Jewish prayer for vengeance found at Rheneia: see Deissmann LAZ, Fig. 64, p. 424. MGr παίρίν)ω, “take,”…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐπαίρω (epairō) — to lift up.

ἐπαίρω,

Ionic dialect and poetry ἐπᾰείρω [Refs 8th c.BC+]: future ἐπᾱρῶ (contraction from ᾰερ-) [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist ἐπῆρα, participle ἐπάρας [Refs 5th c.BC+]: perfect ἐπῆρκα [Refs 4th c.BC+] —passive, aorist ἐπήρθην, participle ἐπαρθείς: lift up and set on, [αὐτὸν] ἀμαξάων ἐπάειρραν lifted and set him upon.., [Refs 8th c.BC+]

2. lift, raise, κεφαλὴν ἐπαείρας [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πάντες ἐπῆραν (i.e. τὴν χεῖρα) [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ἐπαιρόμενα ἱστία, opposed to ὑφιέμενα, [Refs 1st c.AD+] —middle, με τεῷ ἐπαείραο μαζῷ didstliftand put me to thy breast, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; [λόγχην] [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐπαίρω

epairo

from 1909 and 142; to raise up (literally or figuratively):--exalt

self, poise (lift, take) up.

see GREEK for 1909

see GREEK for 142

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐπαίρω

v.

I raise, lift up

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐπαίρω epairō 19x

to lift up, raise, elevate; to hoist, Acts 27:40; τὴν φωνήν, to lift up the voice, to speak in a loud voice, Lk. 11:27; τὰς χεῖρας, to lift up the hands in prayer, Lk. 24:50; 1 Tim. 2:8; τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς, to lift up the eyes, to look, Mt. 17:8; τὴν κεφαλήν, to lift up the head, to be encouraged, animated, Lk. 21:28; τὴν πτέρναν, to lift up the heel, to attack, assault; or, to seek one’s overthrow or destruction, Jn. 13:18; pass. to be borne upwards, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐπαίρω ionic and poet. ἐπαείρω fut. -α^ρῶ aor1 -ῆρα Pass., aor1 ἐπήρθην to lift up and set on a car or stand, c. gen., Il.

to lift, raise, id. Il., Soph., etc.: Mid., ὅπλα ἐπαίρεσθαι Eur.

to exalt, magnify, Xen.

intr. to lift up one's leg or rise up, Hdt.

to stir up, excite, id. Hdt., Soph., etc.: — to induce or persuade one to do, c. inf., Hdt., Ar.: —Pass. to be led on, excited, Hdt., etc.

Pass., also, to be elated at a thing, id. Hdt., Thuc., etc.:—absol. to be conceited or proud, Ar.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-AAP-NPM — Verb · aorist · active · participle · nominative · plural · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-AAP-NPM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
37%having lifted up
having lifted up37% · 7×lifted up11% · 2×do lift up11% · 2×he was taken up5% · 1×he lifted up5% · 1×they lifted up5% · 1×having hoisted5% · 1×lifting itself up5% · 1×other renderings16% · 3×

19 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 11 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
ἀνακύπτωI raise myself, ΒηθανίαBethanyἸησοῦςJesus
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,βλέπωI look, see
οὗτος
αὐτός
ᾅδηςHades
Article the
ὀφθαλμόςthe eye
Article the
ἐπαίρωhaving hoisted19×
what comes after →
Article the
ὀφθαλμόςthe eyeφωνήa sound, noise, κεφαλήthe head
δέbut, on the other ha
Article the
τὶς
φωνήa sound, noise,
εἰς
Article the
οὖνtherefore, then
Article the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐπαίρω · 19× in the New Testament
Luke Acts John 2 Corinthians 1 Timothy Matthew
Across the New Testament6 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 36 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus Clement of Rome The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaOn Sobriety 40c. AD 40

ὁ δὲ σώφρων τὸν εἰς ἀσωτίαν δεινὸν ἐπᾶραι καὶ παρακαλέσαι τυφλὸν πλοῦτον, ἵνα βλέποντα ἀποδείξῃ·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 20.82c. AD 75–95

ταῦτα ἀκούσας ὁ Πάρθος ἐπήρθη πρὸς τὸν πόλεμον, καὶ προφάσεως δικαίας μηδεμίαν ἀφορμὴν ἔχων τὰς ὑπὸ τοῦ πατρὸς αὐτῷ δοθείσας τιμὰς ἔπεμψεν ἀπαιτῶν, ἀπειθήσαντι δὲ πόλεμον κατήγγελλεν.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 14.5c. AD 96

καὶ πάλιν λέγει: Εἶδον ἀσεβῆ ὑπερυψούμενον καὶ ἐπαιρόμενον ὡς τὰς κέδρους τοῦ Λιβάνου: καὶ παρῆλθον, καὶ ἰδοὺ οὐκ ἦν, καὶ ἐξεζήτησα τὸν τόπον αὐτοῦ, καὶ οὐχ εὗρον.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 7th c. AD 2nd c. AD 3rd c. BC
P.Lond. 7 1975Philadelphia (Arsinoites)255 BC

εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν τῆς Δήμητρος. εἰς τὸ ἄβατον θύραν α καὶ τὸν μέσον τοῖχον ἐπᾶραι καὶ τὸν τοῦ περιβόλου τοῖχον ἀπὸ βορρᾶ ἐπᾶραι.

BGU 11 2063Philadelphia (Arsinoites)AD 157–AD 162

αὐτὸς κωμογραμματεὺς ἐν οἷς εἰσι νῦν εἰς ἃς προεῖπον ἀνέδωκέν με κατʼ ἄγνοιαν καὶ ἐπήραν ἀρούρας ζ 𐅵 ἅσπερ κατ … ας ὁ αὐτὸς Πτολλᾶς ἐμερίσατο εἰς

Pap. Congr. XXIV (Helsinki 2004) p. 111-128Sadaqa (Tertia Palaestina Salutaris)AD 574

καὶ εἰπεῖν ὅτι μὰ τὰς ἁγίας γραφὰς ταύτας ὅτι οὐκ οἶδα οὐ σύνοιδα ὅτι ἐπήρθη ἐκ τῆς ὕλης καὶ λιθίας καὶ θυρωμάτων τῆς σῆς οἰκήσεως τίποτε οὔτε οἶδα εἰς

And the anchors having cut away they were leaving [them] in the sea, at the same time having loosened the ropes of the rudders And having hoisted the foresail to the blowing [wind] they were making for the shore.
τὸνho the G3588 Article · accusative · singular · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-ASM — Article · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-ASM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

And the anchors having cut away they were leaving [them] in the sea, at the same time having loosened the ropes of the rudders And having hoisted the foresail to the blowing [wind] they were making for the shore.
ἀρτέμωναartemōn foresail G736 Noun · accusative · singular · masculine
1× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The foresail of a ship is called artemon in the Bible, as seen in Acts 27. It is a sail set on the foremast of a vessel, helping it to move forward. The apostle Paul sailed on such a ship during his journeys.
Amplified meaning
the sail at the front, the artemon
Tyndale gloss
foresail
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀρτέμων (i.e., *artemon*) refers to a type of sail on a ship, specifically a foresail or topsail. It is derived from the verb ἀρτάω meaning 'to fasten.' In the New Testament, it appears in Acts 27:40, where its exact type is somewhat debated among scholars, with some suggesting it may refer to a smaller sail used in strong winds.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

*† ἀρτέμων, -ωνος (Rec. -ονος), ὁ

(< ἀρτάω, to fasten to),

a fore-sail or top-sail: Ac 27:40 (v. DB, ext., 366b, 399a; MM, s.v.).†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀρτέμων, -ovos (LT Tr WH -avos, cf. W. 8 9,1d.; [B. 24 (22)]), 6, top-sail [or foresail?] of a ship: Acts xxvii. 40; cf. Meyer ad loc.; [esp. Smith, Voyage and Shipwr. of St. Paul, p. 192 sq.; Graser in the Philologus, 3d suppl. 1865, p. 201 sqq. ].

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀρτέμων. What particular sail is to be understood by ἀ. in Ac 274° is uncertain. Sir W. M. Ramsay (Hastings’ D&B V. p. 399) refers to the case mentioned by Juvenal (Sa¢ 1259) where a disabled ship made its way into harbour welo prorva suo, which the scholiast explains avtemone solo. According to this, the ἀρτέμων would be a sail set on the bow. See also Breusing Die Nautik der Alten, p. 79 f. (cited by Preuschen, ad Ac 274° in HZN7).

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀρτέμων (artemōn) — foresail.

ἀρτέμ-ων, ονος, ὁ,

(ἀρτάω) foresail of a ship, [NT+6th c.AD+]

II. principal pulley in a system, [Refs 1st c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀρτέμων

artemon

from a derivative of 737; properly, something ready (or else more

remotely from 142 (compare 740); something hung up), i.e. (specially)

the topsail (rather foresail or jib) of a vessel:--mainsail.

see GREEK for 737

see GREEK for 142

see GREEK for 740

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀρτέμων, ονος, ὁ

n.m.

a foresail, set on the bow

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀρτέμων artemōn 1x

a topsail, foresail; or, according to others, the dolon of Pliny and Pollux, a small sail near the bow of the ship, which was hoisted when the wind was too strong to use the larger sails, Acts 27:40*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀρτέμων ἀρτάω prob. a foresail, NTest.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-ASM — Noun · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

for'sal, for'-s'-l (Ac 27:40).

See SHIPS AND BOATS.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
100%foresail
foresail100% · 1×

1 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

Concordanceἀρτέμων · 1× in the New Testament
Acts
Across the New Testament1 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. BC 1st c. AD 2nd c. AD 2nd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Tebt. 3.2 894Tebtynis (Arsinoites)115 BC

τ Θέων τ Μαρῆς ρξ Ὧρος Πακύσιος σ … ο … λατας ρ κ Ἀρτέμων σ Πεκῦσις σ Εὔδημος σ Πομοῦς τ Νααρῶς τ Φατρῆς σ Τράλλις σ Πατῦνις

SB 1 1726ThebenAD 1–AD 100

Ψενθοὺτ Νικολᾶς Τολμᾶς Ἕρμῶν Ἑρμοφείλου Λονχᾶς μ Ἀλεξᾶς νε Σεσονγῶσις κη … Ἀρτέμων ρμ η Κορ … αβος

P.Amh. 2 75HermopolisAD 161–AD 168

ἐπὶ τῷ ἐνεστῶτι … ἔτει Ἀντωνείνου καὶ Οὐήρου τῶν κυρίων Σεβαστῶν ὁ υἱὸς μου Ἀρτέμων … ωνος … καὶ ὀφείλει ἐπικριθῆναι … ου μ

And the anchors having cut away they were leaving [them] in the sea, at the same time having loosened the ropes of the rudders And having hoisted the foresail to the blowing [wind] they were making for the shore.
τῇho to the G3588 Article · dative · singular · feminine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-DSF — Article · dative · singular · feminine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-DSF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
to the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

And the anchors having cut away they were leaving [them] in the sea, at the same time having loosened the ropes of the rudders And having hoisted the foresail to the blowing [wind] they were making for the shore.
πνεούσῃpneō blowing [wind] G4154 Verb · present · active · participle · dative · singular · feminine
7× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To blow or breathe hard, like a strong wind, as seen in Matthew 7:25 and Luke 12:55.
Amplified meaning
the breeze, the blowing air
Tyndale gloss
to blow
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word πνέω (i.e., *pneo*) means 'to breathe' or 'to blow,' particularly in reference to wind. It is used in various contexts, including the New Testament, where it describes the wind in passages like Matthew 7:25 and 27. The word can also imply drawing breath or living, and it has metaphorical uses, such as expressing spirit or emotion.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

πνέω,

[in LXX: Ps 147:7 (18) (נשׁב hi.), Is 40:24 (נשׁף), Si 43:16, 20, Ep. Je 61, II Mac 9:7*;]

to breathe, blow: of the wind, Mt 7:25, 27, Lk 12:55, Jo 3:8 6:18, Re 7:1; τῇ πνεούσῃ (sc. αὔρᾳ), Ac 27:40 (cf. ἐκ-, ἐν-, ὑπο-πνέω).†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πνέω; 1 aor ἔπνευσα; fr. Hom. down; fo breathe, to | blow: of the wind, Mt. vii. 25, 27; Lk. xii. 55; Jn. ii. 8; vi. 18; Rev. vii. 1; τῇ mveovoy sc. αὔρᾳ (ef. W. 591 (550); [B. 82 (72)]), Acts xxvii.40. [Comp.: éx-, ἐν-» ὑπο- πνέω.]

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

πνέω, ‘*breathe,” ‘‘blow”’: see the imprecatory tablet Wiinsch AF 315. found in the grave of an official of Imperial times in the neighbourhood of Carthage, στρέβλωσον (‘strain tight”’) αὐτῶν τὴν ψυχὴν καὶ τὴν καρδίαν ἵνα μὴ [π]νέωσιν. With Ac οἱ, cf. Herodas VIII. 58 τὰ δεινὰ πνεῦσαι (and see Headlam’s note p. 392).

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πνέω (pneō) — to blow.

πνέω,

poetry πνείω as always in [Refs 8th c.BC+]future πνεύσομαι (ἐκ-) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also πνευσοῦμαι [LXX+5th c.BC+] is falsa lectio in [Refs 4th c.BC+]: aorist 1 ἔπνευσα [Refs 8th c.BC+]perfect πέπνευκα (ἐπι-) [Refs 5th c.BC+] —passive, future πνευσθήσομαι (δια-) [Refs 2nd c.AD+]aorist ἐπνεύσθην (δι-) [Refs 8th c.BC+]present and imperfect, to which Trag. add future and aorist 1 active —For the form ἄμπνυε, see. {ἀναπνέω}; for ἀμπνύνθη, -πνυτο, see at {ἄμπνυτο}; and for perfect passive πέπνῡμαι, participle πεπνῡμένος, see at {πέπνυμαι}.—Like other disyllable Verbs in -έω, this Verb contracts only εε, εε; but ἐκπνέων is disyllable in [Refs 4th c.BC+]:—blow, of wind and air, οὐδέ ποτ᾽ οὖροι πνείοντες φαίνονθ᾽ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τῷ πνέοντι (i.e. ἀνέμῳ or πνεύματι) [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; ἡ πνέουσα (i.e. αὔρα) [NT]; also of a flute-player, μέγα πνέων [Refs 2nd…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

πνέω

pneo

a primary word; to breathe hard, i.e. breeze:--blow. Compare 5594.

see GREEK for 5594

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πνέω

v.

I blow

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πνέω pneō 7x

to breathe; to blow, as the wind, Mt. 7:25, 27

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

πνέω Like other dissyl. Verbs in -έω, this Verb only contracts εε, εει to blow, of wind and air, Od., Hdt., attic; ἡ πνέουσα (sc. αὔρα) the breeze, NTest.

to breathe, send forth an odour, Od.:—c. gen. to breathe or smell of a thing, Anth.

of animals, to breathe hard, pant, gasp, Il., Aesch.

generally, to draw breath, breathe, and so to live, Hom.; οἱ πνέοντες ῀ οἱ ζῶντες, Soph.

metaph., c. acc. cogn. to breathe forth, breathe, μένεα πνείοντες breathing spirit, of warriors, Il.; so, πῦρ πν. Hes.; φόνον, κότον, Ἄρη Aesch.; so, πνέοντας δόρυ καὶ λόγχας Ar.; Ἀλφειὸν πνέων, of a swift runner, id. Ar.

μέγα πνεῖν to be of a high spirit, give oneself airs, Eur.; τόσονδ᾽ ἔπνευσας id. Eur.:—also, with a nom., as if it were the wind, μέγας πνέων id. Eur.; πολὺς ἔπνει καὶ λαμπρὸς ἦν…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PAP-DSF — Verb · present · active · participle · dative · singular · feminine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAP-DSF Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

wind (anemos:

1. Causes:

Unequal distribution of heat in the atmosphere causes currents of air or wind. The heated air rises and the air from around rushes in. The direction from which a current comes determines its name, as west wind coming from the West but blowing toward the East. When two currents of air of different directions meet, a spiral motion sometimes results.

See WHIRLWIND.

2. West Wind:

In Palestine the west wind is the most common. It comes from the sea and carries the moisture which condenses to form clouds, as it is turned upward by the mountains, to the cooler layers of the atmosphere. If the temperature reached is cool enough the cloud condenses and rain falls. Elijah looked toward the West for the "small cloud," and soon "the heavens grew black with clouds and wind" (1Ki 18:44 f). "When ye see a cloud rising in the…

Nave's Topical Bible

→ Blasting 2Ki 19:7,35

→ East

Hot and blasting in Egypt Ge 41:6

In the valley of the Euphrates River Eze 19:12

In Canaan Ho 13:15; Lu 12:55

At the city of Nineveh Jon 4:8

Tempestuous in the land of Uz Job 27:21

→ West

Took away the plague of locusts from the land of Egypt Ex 10:19

→ North

Free from humidity in Canaan Pr 25:23

→ South

Soothing Job 37:17

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
43%blowing
blowing43% · 3×blew29% · 2×may blow14% · 1×blows14% · 1×

7 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 7 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
ποταμόςa river, torrent
νότοςthe south wind, the
ὅτανwhen, whensoever
θέλωI will, wish, desire
ὅπουwhere, whither
μέγας
ἄνεμοςthe wind
Article the
ἀρτέμωνa foresail, set
πνέωblowing [wind]
what comes after →
Article the
ἄνεμοςthe wind
λέγωI say, speak
ὅτιthat, since, bec
καίand, even, also, nam
Article the
διεγείρωI wake out of sleep,
κατέχωI hold fast, bind, r
εἰς

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπνέω · 7× in the New Testament
John Matthew Acts Luke Revelation
Across the New Testament5 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Ignatius of Antioch Josephus
Philo of AlexandriaOn Joseph 21c. AD 40

τραχύτατοι γάρ ἐστε εἰς ὀργὴν καὶ ἀπαραίτητοι καὶ πνεῖ λαμπρὸς ἔτι ὁ ἐν ἑκάστῳ θυμός.“

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 7.77c. AD 75–95

πρὶν ἢ τὰ ἄλση σαλεύεσθαι μὴ πνέοντος ἀνέμου.

Ignatius of AntiochThe Letters of Ignatius 1.17.1c. AD 110

Διὰ τοῦτο μύρον ἔλαβεν ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς αὐτοῦ ὁ κύριος, ἵνα πνέῃ τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ ἀφθαρσίαν, μὴ ἀλείφεσθε δυσωδίαν τῆς διδασκαλίας τοῦ ἄρχοντος τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου, μὴ αἰχμαλωτίσῃ ὑμᾶς ἐκ τοῦ προκειμένου ζῆν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
8th c. AD
P.Lond. 4 1549Aphrodites Kome (Antaiopolites)AD 701–AD 800

, Ἰωάννης Μα … , Μάρκος Κυριλ … , Ἀθανάσιος Ἰωάννου, Σενούθιος Δανιὴλ, Πνει Γεωργίου, Ἐνὼχ Πεκυσίου, γίνονται ὀνόματα κε διʼ ἐμοῦ Θεοδώρου σὺν Θεῷ συμβολαιογράφου

P.Lond. 4 1556Aphrodites Kome (Antaiopolites)AD 701–AD 800

γ διὰ Κυριακοῦ πρεσβυτέρου νομίσματος γ διὰ Δανιὴλ καὶ υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ νομίσματα β διὰ Πνει Τζατζωι νομίσματος γ … ⲙⲛ ⲃⲓⲕⲧⲱⲣ ⲙⲛ ⲥⲓⲟⲥ ⲙⲛ ⲁⲛⲧⲣⲉⲁⲥ ⲙⲛ … διασταλμός ⲛⲧⲁⲛⲥⲙⲛⲧϥ

P.Lond. 4 1562Aphrodites Kome (Antaiopolites)AD 701–AD 800

1 … διὰ Ψάλος Διανη νομίσματος ϛ διὰ Μακαρίου Πκαμε … νομισμα … διὰ Πνει Λεωντίου νομισμα … διὰ Ἡρακλίου Ἑρμαῶτος νομισμα … διὰ Ἰωάννου Ὀννοφρίου νομισμα … διὰ

And the anchors having cut away they were leaving [them] in the sea, at the same time having loosened the ropes of the rudders And having hoisted the foresail to the blowing [wind] they were making for the shore.
κατεῖχονkatechō they were making G2722 Verb · imperfect · active · indicative · third person · plural
18× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
rarer in Acts than elsewhere in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To hold back means to keep or restrain something, like in Luke 8:15 and Romans 1:18. It can also mean to possess or have control over something, like in 1 Corinthians 7:30 and 1 Thessalonians 5:21.
Tyndale gloss
to hold back/fast
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

κατέχω is built from the prefix κατ- and the verb ἔχω, meaning to hold or possess. It encompasses a range of meanings including to hold fast, restrain, and detain. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts such as retaining faith (1 Thessalonians 5:21) and restraining evil (2 Thessalonians 2:6-7). The lexicons do not show significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

κατ-έχω,

[in LXX for אחז, חזק hi., etc.;]

perfective of ἔχω (M, Pr., 116; M, Th., 155),

to possess, hold fast: Lk 8:15, Jo 5:[4], Ro 1:18 (Lft., Notes, 251), I Co 7:30 11:2, II Co 6:10, I Th 5:21, He 3:6, 14 10:23;

to lay hold of, get possession of: Lk 14:9.

to hold back, detain, restrain (M, Th., 156 f.): c. acc. seq. τοῦ μή c. inf., Lk 4:42; seq. πρός, c. acc., Phm 13; absol., τὸ κατέχον (ὁ κ.), II Th…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

κατέχω; impf. κατεῖχον; 2 aor. subjunc. κατάσχω; impf. pass. κατειχόμην ; 1. to hold back, detain, retain; a. τινά, from going away, foll. by τοῦ μή w. inf., Lk. iv. 42 [B. § 140, 16 8.; οἵ. W. 604 (561)]; τινὰ πρὸς ἐμαυτόν, Philem. 13. Pass. (as often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; ef. Passow 8. v. p. 1677*; [L. and 5. 5. ν. II. 67), of some troublesome condition or circumstance by which one is held as it were bound: νοσήματι, Jn. v. 4[GT Tr WHom. the passage]; ἔν τινι, Ro. vii. 6. b. to restrain, hinder (the course or progress of): τ. ἀλήθειαν ἐν ἀδικίᾳ, Ro. i. 18; absol. τὸ κατέχον, that which hinders, se. Antichrist from making his appearance (see avrixpiotos); the power of the Roman empire is meant; 6 κατέχων he that hinders, checks, sc. the advent of Antichrist, denotes the one in whom that power is lodged, the Roman emperor: 2 Th. ii. 6 sq. (cf., besides De Wette and Liinemann ad…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

κατέχω royal ordinance—s.c. 118) κρατεῖν ὧν κατεσχήκασι κλή(ρων), ‘shall have the legal ownership of the lands which they have possessed ” (Edd.), P Oxy II. 237 Vili 22 (a.p, 186) διαζητοῦντί μοι μαθεῖν ἐκ τίνος ὑποθέσεως ἐτελεῖτο τὰς Αἰγυπτιακὰς γυναῖκας κατὰ ἐνχώριον νόμιμα (/ νόμισμα) κατέχειν τὰ ὑπάρχοντα τῶν ἀνδρῶν διὰ τῶν γαμικῶν συνγραφῶν κτλ., ‘when I wished to know on what pretext it came about that Egyptian wives have by native Egyptian law a claim upon their husbands’ property through their marriage contracts” etc. (Edd.). Cf. also P Oxy IV. γ7γ1315 (A.D. 97) where the parents κατέσχον τῇ ἐξ ἀλλήλων γενεᾷ τὰ ἑαυτῶν πάντα, ‘settled upon their joint issue the whole of their property” (Edd.). (2) From this it is an easy transition to the meaning ‘‘ lay hold of,” ‘* take possession of,’ as in Lk 14%: see e.g. P Amh II. 3076 (ii/B.c.) where in an official report regarding the…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

κατέχω (katechō) — to hold back/fast.

κατέχω,

future καθέξω (of duration) [Refs 8th c.BC+]aorist κατέσχον, poetry

__A κατέσχεθον [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Epic dialect 3rd.pers. singular κάσχεθε [Refs 8th c.BC+], Aeolic dialect κατέσκ [εθε] [Refs 7th c.BC+]; late aorist κατέσχα [Refs 4th c.AD+]

__A.I transitive, hold fast, καλύπτρην χείρεσσι [Refs 8th c.BC+]

__A.I.b hold back, withhold, εἴ με βίῃ ἀέκοντα καθέξει [Refs 8th c.BC+]: check, restrain, bridle, ἑωυτόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; [γυναῖκε] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὀργήν, θυμόν, ὕβριν, etc., [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. τὴν ἀγωγήν put it off, [Refs]; κ. τὸ πλῆθος ἐλευθέρως, ἰσχύϊ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οὖρον hold in, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἑαυτὸν κατέχει μὴ ἐπιπηδᾶν restrains himself from.., [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—passive, to be held down, γλῶσσα κατείχετο [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to be bound…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

κατέχω

katecho

from 2596 and 2192; to hold down (fast), in various applications

(literally or figuratively):--have, hold (fast), keep (in memory),

let, X make toward, possess, retain, seize on, stay, take, withhold.

see GREEK for 2596

see GREEK for 2192

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

κατέχω

v.

I hold fast, bind, restrain

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

κατέχω katechō 17x

(1) transitive, to hold down; to detain, retain, Lk. 4:42; Rom. 1:18; Phlm. 13; to hinder, restrain, 2 Thess. 2:6, 7; to hold downright, hold in a firm grasp, to have in full and secure possession, 1 Cor. 7:30; 2 Cor. 6:10; to come into full possession of, seize upon; to keep, retain, 1 Thess. 5:21; to occupy, Lk. 14:9; met. to hold fast mentally, retain, Lk. 8:15; 1 Cor. 11:2; 15:2…

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

κατέχω fut. καθέξω fut. κατασχήσω aor2 κατέσχον poet. κατέσχεθον epic 3rd sg. κάσχεθε trans. to hold fast, Hes.

to hold back, withhold, Hom.:— to check, restrain, control, bridle, Hdt., attic: —Pass. to be held down, to be bound, kept under, Hdt.

to detain, id. Hdt., Xen.:—Pass. to be detained, to stay, stop, tarry, Hdt., Soph.

to have in possession, possess, occupy, Trag.

of sound, to fill, ἀλαλητῷ πεδίον κατέχουσι Il.; κ. στρατόπεδον δυσφημίαις to fill it with his grievous cries, Soph.

βιοτὰν κ. to continue a life, id. Soph.

to occupy, be spread over, cover, νὺξ κάτεχ᾽ οὐρανόν Od.; ἡμέρα κατέσχε γαῖαν Aesch.:—in Mid., κατέσχετο πρόσωπα covered her face, Od.

of the grave, to confine, cover, Hom.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-IAI-3P — Verb · imperfect · active · indicative · third person · plural
imperfect active indicative — a continuing action in past time.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-IAI-3P Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Imperfect Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Plural

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
11%possessing
possessing11% · 2×restraining11% · 2×keep11% · 2×they were making6% · 1×suppressing6% · 1×we were bound6% · 1×you are keeping6% · 1×you hold fast6% · 1×other renderings39% · 7×

18 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 15 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 18 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
νῦνnow, already, atμόνοςalone, but, only
βέβαιοςfirm, steadfast, end
τέλοςan end, purpose,
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτός
λόγοςa word, speech, divi
Article the
τόποςa place
ἔσχατοςlast, at the las
κατέχωthey were making18×
what comes after →
αὐτός
Article the
καίand, even, also, nam
καρποφορέωI bear fruit
νόσημαa trouble, disease
εἰς
Article the
ὥστεso that, therefore
δουλεύωI am a slave, am

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκατέχω · 18× in the New Testament
1 Corinthians Hebrews Luke 2 Thessalonians Romans 1 Thessalonians 2 Corinthians Acts John Philemon
Across the New Testament10 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaOn Flight and Finding 151c. AD 40

ἀπέστειλεν οὖν τὸν ἔριφον κομίσασθαι τὸν ἀρραβῶνα παρὰ τῆς γυναικός, οὐ τοῦτο προῃρημένος πάντως ἀπολαβεῖν, ἀλλ’ εἴ ποτε ἀναξία τοῦ κατέχειν ἐκείνη γένοιτο.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 2.21c. AD 75–95

οὕτως δʼ αὐτοὺς Ῥουβῆλος ὁρῶν ἔχοντας ὁ πρεσβύτατος αὐτῶν καὶ πρὸς τὴν πρᾶξιν ὡμονοηκότας ἐπειρᾶτο κατέχειν ὑποδεικνὺς τὸ μέγεθος τοῦ τολμήματος καὶ τὸ ἐπʼ αὐτῷ μύσος,

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD
BGU 4 1148Alexandria14 BC

προσεληλυθέναι αφ … τῇ κατοχῇ αὐτοῦ ἀκολούθως τοῖς τῆς χώρας νόμοις διὰ τὸ αὐτὴν κατέχειν τὴν Διονυσίου συγγραφὴν Αἰγυπτίαν καὶ εἶναι αὐτόθεν ἀκύρους τὰς δύο συνχωρήσεις, μὴ ἐπελεύσεσθαι δὲ

P.Oxy. 49 3466OxyrhynchosAD 81–AD 96

δὲ Δημητρίας ὡσαύτως μετερχομένης τὸν Φανίαν ἀργυρίου δραχμὰς τρισχιλίας ἑξακοσίας … ν … οκα κατείχετο παρʼ ἑαυτῇ μέχρι τῆς τοῦ δανείου κομιδῆς, ἀποπεφηνότος τοῦ Κάρου ἀκολούθως τοῖς γενομένοις ὑπʼ

διαζητοῦντί μοι μαθεῖν ἔκ τινος ὑποθέσεως ἐγένετο τὰς Αἰγυπτίας γυναῖκας κατὰ τὰ ἐνχώρια νόμιμα κατέχειν τὰ ὑπάρχοντα τῶν ἀνδρῶν διὰ τῶν γαμικῶν συνγραφῶν ἑαυταῖς τε καὶ τοῖς τέκνοις, πλειστάκις

And the anchors having cut away they were leaving [them] in the sea, at the same time having loosened the ropes of the rudders And having hoisted the foresail to the blowing [wind] they were making for the shore.
εἰςeis for G1519 Preposition
1,766× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means toward or into, indicating direction or purpose, as seen in Matthew 8:23 and Mark 1:45. It can also imply a sense of movement or action. The KJV translates it in various ways.
Tyndale gloss
toward
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

εἰς is a preposition meaning 'into' or 'to,' used with the accusative case. It indicates direction, entrance, or limit, applicable to place, time, and figurative purposes. The New Testament frequently employs it to express movement toward locations or states, as seen in passages like Matthew 8:23. It can also denote relationships or results, such as 'for' or 'among.'

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

εἰς,

prep. c. acc.,

expressing entrance, direction, limit, into, unto, to, upon, towards, for, among (Lat. in, c. acc.).

Of place.

After verbs of motion;

of entrance into: Mt 8:23 9:7, Mk 1:45, Lk 2:15 8:31, al.;

of approach, to or towards: Mk 11:1, Lk 6:8 19:28, Jo 11:31 21:6, al.;

before pl. and collective nouns, among: Mk 4:7 8:19, 20, Lk 11:49, Jo 21:23, al.;

Of a limit reached, unto, on, upon: Mt 8:18, 21:1, Mk…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

εἰς, a Prep. governing the Accusative, and denoting entrance into, or direction and limit: into, to, towards, for, among. It is used A. Property I. of Place, after verbs of going, coming, sailing, flying, falling, living, leading, carrying, throwing, sending, etc. ; 1. of a place entered, or of entrance into a place, into; and 8. it stands before nouns designating an open place, a hollow thing, or one in which an object can be hidden: as εἰς (τὴν) πόλιν, Mt. xxvi. 18; xxviii. 11; Mk. i. 45, and often; εἰς r. οἶκον, Mt. ix. 7; συναγωγήν, Acts xvii. 10; πλοῖον, Mt. viii. 23; Jn. vi. 17; Acts xxi. 6; θάλασσαν, Mt. xvii. 27; ἄβυσσον, Lk. viii. 31; οὐρανόν, Lk. ii. 15; κόσμον, In. 1. 9; iii. 19, ete.; τὰ ἴδια, Jn. i. 11; xvi. 32; Acts xxi. 6; ἀποθήκην, Mt. iii. 12; εἰς ra ὦτα, Lk. i. 44; εἰς τὰς ζώνας or ζώνην, Mt. x. 9; Mk. vi. 8, etc.; εἰς ἀέρα, 1 Co. xiv. 9; eis πῦρ, Mk. ix. 22, ete.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

εἰς ἁλιέων εἰς ᾿Αλεξάνδριί[αν (P Oxy II. 2943 = Selections, Ρ- 34): see further Pro/eg. pp. 234 f., 245. For εἰς in the wide sense in which we use ‘‘for” we may cite such passages as P Lille I. 261 (iii/B.c.) ἔγραψάς μοι περὶ τῆς εἰς THY σησαμείαν γῆς, 20." ἕως ἂν] μάθωμεν περὶ τῶν κ[εχρ]ηματισμένων εἰς τὸν νομόν, P Petr II. 11 (1)" (mid. iii/B.c.) (= Witkowski*, p. 8) ἀπὸ τούτου τὸ μὲν ἥμυσυ εἰς τὰ δέοντα ὑπελιπόμην, τὸ δὲ λοιπὸν εἰς τὸ δάνειον κατέβαλον, P Lond 43? (ii/B.c.) (=I. p. 48, Witkowski’, p- 110) ἕξεις ἐφόδιον εἰς τὸ γῆρας, P Tebt I. 577 (8.6. 118) προστε]τάχασι δὲ καὶ τὰ els τὴν ταφὴν τοῦ “Amos, P Oxy I. 379 (A.D. 149) (= Selections, p. 49) ἐγένετο ἐνθάδε ἡ τροφεῖτις εἰς υἱὸν tod ΤΠεσούριος, ‘‘there was concluded here the nursing-contract for the son of Pesouris”; and the recurring formulae in a private account of ς. A.D. 15 τό. 1V. 736° θρύων εἰς τοὺς ἄρτους (ὀβολοὶ δύο)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εἰς (eis) — toward.

ἐν εἰς

or ἐς, PREP. WITH ACC. ONLY:—both forms are found in [Refs 8th c.BC+], Ionic dialect poets, and early metrical Inscrr.; ἐς is best attested in [Refs 5th c.BC+], and is found in nearly all early Ionic dialect Inscrr. (except [Refs 5th c.BC+]; and usually in Attic dialect Prose (except [Refs 5th c.BC+] is used before vowels for the sake of meter; ἐς was retained in the phrases ἐς κόρακας (whence the Verb σκορακίζω), ἐς μακαρίαν. Aeolic dialect poets have εἰς before vowels, ἐς before consonants, and this is given as the rule in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; compare ἐν, ἰν. The diphthong is genuine in Aeolic dialect εἰς, but spurious in Attic dialect-Ionic dialect) Radical sense into, and then more loosely, to:

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

εἰς

eis

a primary preposition; to or into (indicating the point reached or

entered), of place, time, or (figuratively) purpose (result, etc.);

also in adverbial phrases:--(abundant-)ly, against, among, as, at,

(back-)ward, before, by, concerning, + continual, + far more

exceeding, for (intent, purpose), fore,

+ forth, in (among, at, unto, -so much that, -to), to the

intent that, + of one mind, + never, of, (up-)on, + perish, + set at

one again, (so) that, therefore(-unto), throughout, til, to (be, the

end, -ward), (here-)until(-to), ...ward, (where-)fore, with. Often

used in composition with the same general import, but only with verbs

(etc.) expressing motion (literally or figuratively).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

εἰς

Prep.

into, in, among, till, for

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

εἰς

into, to c. acc.

PREP. WITH ACC. ONLY. Radical sense, into, and then to:

OF PLACE, the commonest usage, εἰς ἅλα into or to the sea, Hom., etc.:—properly opposed to ἐκ, ἐς σφυρὸν ἐκ πτέρνης from head to foot, Il.; εἰς ἔτος ἐξ ἔτεος from year to year, Theocr.:—then, with all Verbs implying motion or direction, ἰδεῖν εἰς οὐρανόν Il.; εἰς ὦπα ἰδέσθαι to look in the face, id. Il.:—in Hom. and Hdt. also c. acc. pers., where the attic use ὡς, πρός, παρά.

with Verbs which express rest in a place, when a previous motion into or to it is implied, ἐς μέγαρον κατέθηκε, i. e. he brought it into the house, and put it there, Od.; παρεῖναι ἐς τόπον to go to a place and be there, Hdt.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

for (ki (conjunction), le, from 'el (preposition), and various other words. In the New Testament also the words are various, chiefly gar, kai gar, hoti (conjunctions); anti apo eis dia (accusative), epi (dative and accusative), peri (genitive), pros (genitive and accusative), huper (genitive) (prepositions)): the English Revised Version and the American Standard Revised Version give in many cases more literal or more accurate renderings than those in the King James Version.

In the New Testament the most important preps. from a doctrinal point of view are anti, "face to face," "over against," "instead," "on behalf of," peri, "around," "about," "concerning," huper, "over," "on behalf of." The first has been claimed as stating the substitutionary nature of Christ's sacrifice as contrasted with huper and peri, more frequently used of it. But, although anti in the New Testament often means…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
33%into
into33% · 595×to32% · 570×for10% · 185×in9% · 160×unto4% · 69×toward2% · 44×other renderings8% · 145×other renderings2% · 29×

1,797 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial95%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,766 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
βάλλωI cast, throw, rεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inδέbut, on the othe
εἰσέρχομαιI go in, come in, en
καίand, even, also,μήNegαὐτός
ἔρχομαιI come, go
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςοὗτος
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςἐκκόπτωI cut out, cut oπόλιςa city
ἐγώ
εἰμίI am, existκαίand, even, also,δίδωμιI offer, give
εἰςfor1766×
what comes after →
Article the
αἰώνan age, a cycle οἶκοςa house, househoοὐρανόςthe sky, the hea
αὐτός
Article theκαίand, even, also,οὗτος
ἹεροσόλυμαJerusalem
καίand, even, also,εἰςὅτιthat, since, bec
ὅς
καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheἄνDisj
σύ
καίand, even, also,μήNegἐν

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceεἰς · 1,766× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Matthew John Mark Romans Revelation 2 Corinthians Hebrews 1 Peter 1 Corinthians Ephesians

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 9c. AD 40

τὸ δὲ παθητὸν ἄψυχον καὶ ἀκίνητον ἐξ ἑαυτοῦ, κινηθὲν δὲ καὶ σχηματισθὲν καὶ ψυχωθὲν ὑπὸ τοῦ νοῦ μετέβαλεν εἰς τὸ τελειότατον ἔργον, τόνδε τὸν κόσμον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅτι λιμοῦ τὴν Χαναναίαν καταλαβόντος εἰς Αἴγυπτον ἀπῆρε καὶ διατρίψας ἐν αὐτῇ τινα χρόνον ὑπέστρεψεν ὀπίσω.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD 2nd c. BC
P.Grenf. 2 33Pathyris101 BC

καὶ τοῖς μετόχοις γῆς σιτοφόρου λεγομένης Νεχθαραῦτι θεοῦ μεγάλου παρὰ τῶν ἱερέων ἐτῶν δέκα εἰς τὰ ἐνλιπόντα αὐτῷ ἑτέρων , τεσσάρων εἰς συμπλήρωσιν ἐτῶν πέντε , ὥστε γεωργῆσαι ἧς

BGU 3 999Pathyris100 BC

καὶ ἀπηλιώτου τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς Εὐνόου οἰκίας λιβὸς ῥύμη ἐφ ᾧ ἀνοίξει τὴν θύραν εἰς τὴν Ὀρσηοῦς οἰκίαν ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Πετεσοῦχος Νεχθανούπιος ὡς ἐτῶν

P.Adl. 17Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC

ος, βορρᾶ γῆ Σχώτου τοῦ Τρύφωνος, ἀπηλιώτου τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς γῆς, λιβὸς ἡ φέρουσα εἰς τὸ Κρόνειον ὁδός, ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου Πέρσης τῆς

And the anchors having cut away they were leaving [them] in the sea, at the same time having loosened the ropes of the rudders And having hoisted the foresail to the blowing [wind] they were making for the shore.
τὸνho the G3588 Article · accusative · singular · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-ASM — Article · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-ASM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

And the anchors having cut away they were leaving [them] in the sea, at the same time having loosened the ropes of the rudders And having hoisted the foresail to the blowing [wind] they were making for the shore.
αἰγιαλόν.aigialos shore. G123 Noun · accusative · singular · masculine
6× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for a beach or shoreline, used in Matthew 13:2 and John 21:4 to describe the sea-shore.
Amplified meaning
the shore, the coastline, the land
Tyndale gloss
shore
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word αἰγιαλός (lemma: aigialos) means 'sea-shore' or 'beach.' It is derived from the idea of the sea rushing onto the shore. This term appears in several New Testament verses, including Matthew 13:2 and John 21:4. Lexicographers note various possible derivations, but there is no consensus on a single origin.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

αἰγιαλός, -οῦ, ὁ (on the derivation, v. Boisacq, s.v.),

[in LXX: Jg 5:17 (חוֹף), Si 24:14*;]

the sea-shore, beach (cf. Field, Notes, 146; DCG, i, 175 f.; MM, VGT, s.v.): Mt 13:2, 48, Jo 21:4, Ac 21:5 27:39, 40.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

αἰγιαλός, -οὔ, 6, the shore of the sea, beach, [fr. Hom. down]: Mt. xiii. 2, 48; Jn. xxi. 4; Acts xxi. 5; xxvii. 39,40. (Many derive the word from ἄγνυμι and dds, as though equiv. to axrn, the place where the sea breaks ; others fr. αἶγες billows and ds [Curtius § 140; Vaniéek p. 83]; others fr. ἀΐσσω and ἅλς [Schenkl, L. and S., s. vy. ], the place where the sea rushes forth, bounds forward.)

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

αἰγιαλός. The word is common (MGr = ‘‘seashore”) ; but it may be noted that in P Tebt I. 79 (c. B.c. 148) it refers to the shore of Lake Moeris; in 26, 82 (B.C. 115) and 83 (late ii/u.c.) to the shore of a marshy lake then covering the neighbourhood of Medinet Nehds (see the editors’ note on p. 346). So P Fay 82? (a.D. 145), P Tebt II. 308° (A.D. 174). On the use of the term in Ac 27°9, see W. M. Ramsay St Paul, p. 341, and Expositor V. vi. p. 154 ff. P Fay 222 (iii/A.D.) is the beginning of a document addressed Φιλίππῳ αἰγιαλοφύλακι ᾿Αρσινοί[του]. We find γῆ αἰγιαλῖτις mentioned in P Oxy VI. g18™ti 19 (1i/a.p.), P Lond 9247 (a.p. 187-8) (=III. p. 134): Sir F. ἃ. Kenyon renders ‘land on the border of the lake.” , Αἰγύπτιος

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

αἰγιαλός (aigialos) — shore.

αἰγιᾰλός, ὁ,

sea-shore, beach, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; distinguished from ἀκτή, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; αἰγιαλὸν ἔνδον τρέφει a whole beach of voting-pelbles, [Refs 5th c.BC+], of deaf persons, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

αἰγιαλός

aigialos

from aisso (to rush) and 251 (in the sense of the sea; a beach (on

which the waves dash):--shore.

see GREEK for 251

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

αἰγιαλός, οῦ, ὁ

n.m.

sea-coast, beach

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

αἰγιαλός aigialos 6x

seashore, beach, Mt. 13:2, 48; Jn. 21:4; Acts 21:5; 27:39f.*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

αἰγιαλός αἴξ 11 the sea-shore, beach, strand, Hom., Hdt.; αἰγιαλὸν ἔνδον τρέφει, i. e. he has a whole sea-beach (i. e. quantities of voting-pebbles, ψῆφοι) in his house, Ar.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-ASM — Noun · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

shor:

(1) choph, always of the Mediterranean, variously translated "haven," "beach," "shore," "sea-shore," "coast," "sea coast" (Ge 49:13; De 1:7; Jos 9:1; Jud 5:17; Jer 47:7; Eze 25:16).

(2) saphah, literally, "lip"; compare Arabic shafat, "lip"; of the sand upon the seashore, a figure of multitude (Ge 22:17; Ex 14:30; Jos 11:4; Jud 7:12;

Across the New Testament3 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 113c. AD 40

εὐρεῖς γὰρ ἔστιν ὅτε κόλποι θαλάττης ὑποσυρείσης ἀμπώτεσι βαθὺς ἐξαίφνης αἰγιαλός εἰσι καὶ μικρὸν ὕστερον ἀναχυθείσης πελάγη βαθύτατα οὐ βραχείαις ὁλκάσιν ἀλλὰ μυριοφόροις ναυσὶν ἐμπλεόμενα·

JosephusThe Jewish War 1.191c. AD 75–95

κινδυνεύοντα δʼ αὐτὸν ἐν τῇ παρατάξει σὺν ὅλῳ τῷ δεξιῷ κέρατι ῥύεται περιελθὼν Ἀντίπατρος παρὰ τὸν αἰγιαλὸν τοῦ ποταμοῦ·

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 1st c. BC 5th c. AD
CPR 7 1Soknopaiu Nesos (Arsinoites)8 BC–5 BC

ἕνεκα τοῦ τὴν κώμην … … κεισθαι … … πρόσφορον ἡμῖν περιγίνεσθαι, τὸν δὲ αἰγιαλὸν ἐξ οὗ ὑδρεύονται ἀπέχειν … σχοινον, κατὰ δὲ καιρούς τινας τῶν ὑδάτων εἰς τὴν

P. Gen. 1 16Soknopaiu Nesos (Arsinoites)AD 207

προσφέρομεν, κύριε, χρῄζουσαν τῆς σῆς ἐκδικίας ἥτις ἔχει τὸν τρόπον τοῦτον· ἔστιν παρʼ ἡμῖν αἰγιαλὸς ἀναγραφόμενος περὶ τὴν ἡμετέραν κώμην, ὢν ἐν πλείσταις ἀρούραις· καὶ ὁπόταν ἡ τοιαύτη γῆ

CPR 1 32Soknopaiu Nesos (Arsinoites)AD 218

τὴν προκιμένην κώμην πρὸς μόνον τὸ ἐνεστὸς β ἔτος ὧν γείτονες νότου χέρσος βορρᾶ αἰγιαλὸς ἐφυδωρ, ἀπηλιώτου αἰγιαλοῦ ἐδάφη, λιβὸς αἰγιαλοῦ ἐδάφη, ἐκφορίου κατʼ ἄρουραν πυροῦ ἀρταβῶν δύο ὧν

Sources on this page. Lexicons and dictionaries imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones, Robinson and Packard, Webster and Cawdrey. Thayer’s Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament (Harper, 1889 — Grimm’s Wilke’s Clavis Novi Testamenti, translated, revised and enlarged by Joseph Henry Thayer) is public domain and is set here from the Internet Archive page scan greekenglishlex00grim; it is uncorrected OCR, marked as such on the entry itself, and the Strong’s numbers — which Thayer’s own edition does not carry — were matched by lemma against the other modules on this page. Trench’s Synonyms of the New Testament (Macmillan, 1880) and Moulton and Milligan’s Vocabulary of the Greek Testament (Hodder & Stoughton, 1930, which entered the United States public domain on 1 January 2026) are set from Internet Archive page scans synonymsofnewtes00treniala and vocabularyofgree00mouluoft, and are likewise uncorrected OCR matched to Strong’s numbers by lemma. Trench treats a group of words at once, so the same essay stands on the page of each word it compares. The Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary is © 1993 and is used here by permission for non-commercial use, www.teknia.com/greek-dictionary. The full Liddell-Scott-Jones and the Hebrew word data (TAHOT) come from STEPBible.org, CC BY 4.0. Brown-Driver-Briggs is the OpenScriptures digitisation, public domain. Syntax analysis is the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (biblicalhumanities.org); the concordance and morphology are built from the tagged Nestle 1904 text. Septuagint occurrences use the Open Scriptures Septuagint lemma index, derived from CCAT (University of Pennsylvania) and the Rahlfs 1935 dataset by Eliran Wong, CC BY-NC-SA 4.0 — used here on a non-commercial ministry site. Greek of Josephus and Barnabas from the Perseus Digital Library, CC BY-SA 4.0. Commentaries and the Ante-Nicene Fathers are public-domain texts hosted on this site. Everyday Greek from the Duke Databank of Documentary Papyri, CC BY 3.0, with dates and provenance from the Heidelberger Gesamtverzeichnis. Philo and the Apostolic Fathers from Open Greek and Latin (First1KGreek), CC BY-SA 4.0. The apparatus and the fifth Greek column are the SBL Greek New Testament, © 2010 SBL and Logos Bible Software, CC BY 4.0. The Latin is the Clementine Vulgate (public domain); the Syriac New Testament is the ETCBC edition (MIT licence). The Hebrew behind the Greek is computed here from the Septuagint index and TAHOT, not taken from any aligned edition. The translation spread and the per-word edition marks come from the Translators Amalgamated Greek NT (STEPBible, CC BY 4.0); clause roles from the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (CC BY-SA 4.0); place identifications and their confidence from OpenBible.info Bible Geocoding (CC BY 4.0), with map tiles © OpenStreetMap contributors. Gospel parallels are computed here from shared uncommon vocabulary, not taken from any printed harmony. Cross references are the Treasury of Scripture Knowledge and the subject headings are Nave’s Topical Bible, both public domain. Works under Creative Commons licences are used unchanged apart from markup removal.

Everything we make is available for free because of a generous community of supporters.

Donate